table of contents - rls construction...

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1 TC-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE PAGE NO.

BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR ALL CONTRACTS Notice to Bidders To be issued Table of Contents TC-1 TC-4 Instructions to Bidders To be issued Form of Agreement To be issued Contract Bond To be issued General Conditions of Contract To be issued Prevailing Minimum Wage Predetermination To be issued Special Conditions To be issued List of Drawings LD-1 LD-2

VOLUME 1 of 2

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01010 Summary of Work 01010-1 01010-4 Section 01030 Base Bid Descriptions 01030-1 01030-3 Section 01040 Coordination and Control 01040-1 01040-8 Section 01310 Sequence of Construction & Milestones 01310-1 01310-3 Section 01400 Quality Control Testing Services 01400-1 01400-5 Section 01401 Quality Assurance Testing and Inspection 01401-1 01401-4 Services Section 01500 Temporary Utilities 01500-1 01500-4

GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29 Phase 1.1) DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCTION Section 02300 Earthwork 02300-1 02300-8 Section 02741 Asphalt Paving 02741-1 02741-2 Section 02742 Pavement Markings 02742-1 02742-2 Section 02751 Cement Concrete Paving 02751-1 02751-9 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 03300-1 03300-16 DIVISION 4 MASONRY Section 04200 Unit Masonry 04200-1 04200-14 DIVISION 5 METALS Section 05500 Metal Fabrications 05500-1 05500-9 DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 06100-1 06100-9 Section 06650 Solid Polymer Fabrications 06650-1 06650-3

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1 TC-2

DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07195 Air Barriers 07195-1 07195-3 Section 07210 Building Insulation 07210-1 07210-4 Section 07410 Manufactured Roof Panels 07410-1 07410-7 Section 07531 Thermoplastic Sheet Roofing (TPO) 07531-1 07531-10 Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-1 07620-4 Section 07710 Manufactured Roof Specialties 07710-1 07710-3 Section 07720 Roof Hatches 07720-1 07720-4 Section 07900 Joint Sealers 07900-1 07900-7 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08110-1 08110-5 Section 08120 Aluminum Doors and Frames 08120-1 08120-5 Section 08360 Sectional Overhead Doors 08360-1 08360-4 Section 08520 Aluminum Windows 08520-1 08520-8 Section 08710 Door Hardware 08710-1 08710-16 Section 08810 Glass 08810-1 08810-7 DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 09220 Cement Plaster Stucco 09220-1 09220-7 Section 09260 Gypsum Board Systems 09260-1 09260-10 Section 09300 Tile 09300-1 09300-12 Section 09510 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09510-1 09510-6 Section 09900 Painting 09900-1 09900-14 DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Section 10170 Plastic Toilet Compartments 10170-1 10170-6 Section 10440 Interior Signs 10440-1 10440-7 Section 10810 Toilet Accessories 10810-1 10810-5 DIVISION 17 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Section 17000 Removal of Asbestos Containing Materials 17000-1 17000-15 Asbestos Certification of Visual Inspection Form 17000-16 Section 17100 Removal / Disposal of PCB and Mercury- 17100-1 17100-3 Containing Materials

VOLUME 2 of 2 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR-CONDITIONING CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29, PHASE 1.2)

DIVISION 15A HVAC Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 15050-1 15050-5 Section 15062 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and 15062-1 15062-8 Equipment Section 15074 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC 15074-1 15074-4 Piping and Equipment Section 15077 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 15077-1 15077-4 Section 15086 Duct Insulation 15086-1 15086-13 Section 15088 HVAC Piping Insulation 15088-1 15088-14

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1 TC-3

Section 15093 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping 15093-1 15093-2 Section 15098 Escutcheons for HVAC Piping 15098-1 15098-2 Section 15112 General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 15112-1 15112-9 Section 15124 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping 15124-1 15124-4 Section 15127 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping 15127-1 15127-6 Section 15181 Hydronic Piping 15181-1 15181-14 Section 15183 Refrigerant Piping 15183-1 15183-6 Section 15185 Hydronic Pumps 15185-1 15185-7 Section 15189 HVAC Water Treatment 15189-1 15189-4 Section 15513 Condensing Boilers 15513-1 15513-7 Section 15550 Breechings, Chimneys and Stacks 15550-1 15550-4 Section 15725 Modular Indoor Central-Station Air Handling 15725-1 15725-10 Units Section 15732 Packaged Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 15732-1 15732-7 Section 15733 Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilators 15733-1 15733-6 Section 15738 Split-System Air-Conditioning Units 15738-1 15738-5 Section 15761 Air Coils 15761-1 15761-3 Section 15762 Unit Heaters 15762-1 15762-4 Section 15764 Convection Heating Units 15764-1 15764-4 Section 15815 Metal Ducts 15815-1 15815-12 Section 15820 Ductwork Accessories 15820-1 15820-7 Section 15838 HVAC Power Ventilators 15838-1 15838-5 Section 15840 Air Terminal Units 15840-1 15840-5 Section 15855 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 15855-1 15855-4 Section 15900 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls 15900-1 15900-52 Section 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 15950-1 15950-18

PLUMBING CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29 Phase 1.3) DIVISION 15B PLUMBING Section 15051 Common Motor Requirements for 15051-1 15051-3

Plumbing Equipment Section 15061 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and 15061-1 15061-11 Equipment Section 15075 Identification for Plumbing Piping and 15075-1 15075-6 Equipment Section 15061 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing 15061-1 15061-11 Piping and Equipment Section 15082 Plumbing Piping Insulation 15082-1 15082-15 Section 15111 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 15111-1 15111-6 Section 15121 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing 15121-1 15121-3 Piping Section 15123 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 15123-1 15123-7 Section 15124 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping 15124-1 15124-5 Section 15140 Domestic Water Piping 15140-1 15140-10 Section 15145 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 15145-1 15145-8 Section 15146 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping 15146-1 15146-3 Section 15150 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 15150-1 15150-11 Section 15151 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 15151-1 15151-10 Section 15194 Facility Natural Gas Piping 15194-1 15194-16

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1 TC-4

Section 15410 Commercial Water Closets 15410-1 15410-5 Section 15411 Commercial Urinals 15411-1 15411-3 /Section 15412 Commercial Lavatories 15412-1 15412-6 Section 15413 Commercial Showers, Receptors and Basins 15413-1 15413-4 Section 15415 Pressure Water Coolers 15415-1 15415-4 Section 15486 Fuel-Fired, Domestic Water Heaters 15486-1 15486-7

ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29 Phase 1.4) DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Section 16055 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination 16055-1 16055-8 Study Section 16056 Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash 16056-1 16056-7 Study Section 16060 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 16060-1 16060-6 Section 16072 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 16072-1 16072-5 Section 16075 Identification for Electrical Systems 16075-1 16075-7 Section 16091 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical 16091-1 16091-3 Raceways and Cabling Section 16092 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Low Voltage 16092-1 16092-4 Pathways and Cabling Section 16120 Conductors and Cables 16120-1 16120-5 Section 16130 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 16130-1 16130-8 Section 16140 Wiring Devices 16140-1 16140-7 Section 16231 Packaged Engine Generators 16231-1 16231-12 Section 16289 Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical 16289-1 16289-4 Power Circuits Section 16410 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 16410-1 16410-5 Section 16415 Transfer Switches 16415-1 16415-7 Section 16420 Enclosed Controllers 16420-1 16420-6 Section 16442 Panelboards 16442-1 16442-8 Section 16491 Fuses 16491-1 16491-4 Section 16511 Interior Lighting 16511-1 16511-8 Section 16711 Pathways for Low Voltage Systems 16711-1 16711-7 Section 16717 Communications Horizontal Cabling 16717-1 16717-9 Section 16718 Conductors and Cables for Low Voltage 16718-1 16718-8 Systems Section 16721 Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System 16721-1 16721-17

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1 LD-1

LIST OF DRAWINGS

NUMBER AND TITLE OF DRAWINGS CS-1 Cover Sheet CS-2 Site Staging Plan CS-3 Construction Sequencing Plan GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29 PHASE 1.1) CIVIL C101 Site Plan C102 Site Details STRUCTURAL S001 Structural Notes & Typical Details S101 Roof Framing Plan ARCHITECTURAL A001 Symbol Key, Abbreviations & Code Study Sheet A002 Building Code Plan A100 Demolition Plan A101 Overview Floor Plan A102 Floor Plan Area ‘A’ A103 Floor Plan Area ‘B’ A104 Floor Plan Area ‘C’ A105 Mezzanine Floor Plan A106 Roof Plan A107 Reflected Ceiling Plan A301 Exterior Elevations A411 Wall Sections A531 Details A801 Interior Elevations A900 Door & Window Schedules A901 Base Bid #5 Door Schedule A901 Room Finish Schedule & Material Schedule HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR-CONDITIONING CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29 PHASE 1.2) HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING H000 HVAC Symbols, Notes & Abbreviations H100 Lower Level Plan – Demo – HVAC H101 Mezzanine Level Plan – Demo – HVAC H200 Lower Level Plan – New Work – HVAC H201 Mezzanine Level Plan – New Work – HVAC H300 Lower Level Plan – Piping – HVAC H301 Mezzanine Level Plan – Piping – HVAC H600 HVAC – Large Scale Plans H700 HVAC – Details

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1 LD-2

H701 HVAC - Details H800 HVAC – Schedules PLUMBING CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29 PHASE 1.3) PLUMBING P000 Plumbing Symbols, Notes & Abbreviations P100 Overall Plan – Demolition – Plumbing P200 Overall Plan – New Work – Plumbing P400 Large Scale Plans – New Work – Plumbing P700 Plumbing Details P800 Plumbing Schedules ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29 PHASE 1.4) ELECTRICAL E000 Electrical Symbols, Notes & Abbreviations E001 Site Plan - Electrical E100 Lower Level Plan – Demo – Electrical E101 Mezzanine Level Plan – Demo – Electrical E200 Lower Level & Mezzanine Plans – New Work – Lighting E201 Lower Level & Mezzanine Plans – Emergency System – Base Bid 4 E300 Lower Level Floor Plan – New Work - Electrical E301 Mezzanine Level Plan – New Work – Electrical E600 Electrical – Large Scale Plans E700 Existing Conditions Electrical One-Line Diagram E701 New Work Electrical One-Line Diagram E702 Details – Electrical E800 Schedules - Electrical The Professional, when directed by the Department, will furnish from time to time, as the work progresses, such supplemental drawings as may be required for further illustrating the details of the work, but these supplemental drawings will not include the shop drawings, all of which are to be prepared by the contractor and submitted as specified for approval before the work is started.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 1 01010-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

FOR DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION TITLE PAGE NO. Section 01010 Summary of Work 01010-1 01010-4 Section 01030 Base Bid Descriptions 01030-1 01030-3 Section 01040 Coordination and Control 01040-1 01040-8 Section 01310 Sequence of Construction & Milestones 01310-1 01310-3 Section 01400 Quality Control Testing Services 01400-1 01400-5 Section 01401 Quality Assurance Testing and Inspection Services 01401-1 01401-4 Section 01500 Temporary Utilities 01500-1 01500-4

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 1 01010-2

SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS

A. The specifications sections " General Conditions of the Construction Contract ", "Special Conditions", and "Division 1 - General Requirements" form a part of this Section by this reference thereto, and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

1.2 LOCATION

A. 1720 East Caracas Avenue, Derry Township, Dauphin County, Hershey, Pennsylvania, 17033.

1.3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

A. The project includes renovations to a 21,789 s.f. Readiness Center, built in 1974. The existing building is a single story masonry building with steel joist roof framing, and an EPDM roof. Renovations will be made to improve the energy efficiency of the building through the replacement of doors and windows, roofing and roof insulation, as well as the heating and air conditioning systems. Renovations also include providing Women’s showers and renovating both the Men’s and Women’s facilities to meet current handicapped accessibility standards.

1.4 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work of this Project consists of, but is not necessarily limited to, the following. Detailed requirements of the Work are described in the pertinent specification Sections and/or shown on the Drawings.

B. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION (.1)

1. Replace the existing roofing and insulation with R-20 insulation and TPO roofing. 2. Replace all door hardware within the facility to meet current handicapped

accessibility standards. 3. Expand the Women’s room into the current IT room to provide three showers,

renovating the existing Women’s Toilet to provide three toilets and two sinks. 4. Renovate the Men’s room to meet current handicapped accessibility standards. 5. Patch, repair and refinish the building shell, including stripping and painting the

corrugated metal siding, rebuilding a bowed brick veneer wall, covering spalled precast with aluminum, replacing the standing seam metal entrance canopy, patching the stucco entrance soffit and infilling abandoned openings in the exterior wall.

6. Provide new handicapped curb cut and sloped sidewalk up to the main entry.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 1 01010-3

7. Replace all windows as part of Base Bids 2, 3 and 4. 8. Replace all swinging and overhead doors as part of Base Bids 3 and 4. 9. Seal and re-stripe the existing parking lot as part of Base Bids 3 and 4. 10. Replace interior doors as part of Base Bid 5.

C. HVAC CONSTRUCTION (.2)

1. Demolition of existing equipment, ductwork, piping, controls, and appurtenances as noted on contact drawings.

2. Furnish and install new boiler, hot water pumps, piping, and appurtenances 3. Furnish and install packaged rooftop variable volume unit and associated ductwork,

VAV boxes, air terminals, and appurtenances 4. Furnish and install hot water air handling units, limited ductwork, piping, and

appurtenances 5. Furnish and install energy recovery unit, ductwork, air terminals, and appurtenances. 6. Furnish and install miscellaneous unit heaters 7. Furnish and install new exhaust fans, ductwork and appurtenances. 7. Furnish and install new DDC based automatic temperature control system 8. Furnish testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. PLUMBING CONSTRUCTION (.3)

1. Demolition of existing equipment, fixtures, piping, and appurtenances as noted on contract drawings.

2. Furnish and install domestic hot water heaters, piping, valves, and appurtenances 3. Furnish and install master mixing valve, piping and appurtenances. 4. Furnish and install all toilet fixtures 5. Furnish and install domestic cold water, domestic hot water, sanitary sewer, and vent

pipe associated with toilet fixture renovation. E. ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION (.4)

1. Demolition of existing electrical equipment, emergency system electrical equipment, light fixtures, wiring, conduit, and appurtenances as noted on the contract drawings.

2. Furnish and install new main distribution panel, branch distribution panel, branch distribution panel interiors, feeders, conduits and appurtenances.

3. Furnish and install new circuit breakers, branch circuits and appurtenances to new equipment.

4. Furnish and install new interior and emergency lighting and egress signage under Base Bids 1, 2 and 3.

5. Furnish and install new fire alarm system, including raceways, control panel, annunciator, customer key-safe box, wiring and devices.

6. Furnish and install miscellaneous telecommunication system including raceways, cabling, devices, and appurtenances.

7. Disconnect, remove and relocate existing telecommunications headend equipment, rack, cabling, and appurtenances to location indicated on contract documents.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 1 01010-4

8. Furnish and install new generator, automatic transfer switch, annunciator panel, emergency branch distribution panel, feeders, conduits and appurtenances for the emergency system under Base Bid 4.

1.5 WORK BY OTHERS A. The Work of this Project consists of, but is not necessarily limited to, the following.

Detailed requirements of the Work are described in the pertinent specification Sections and/or shown on the Drawings.

1.6 QUESTIONS DURING BIDDING PERIOD

A. Direct all questions pertaining to the Project, as shown and described in the Contract Documents, to the Project Professional listed below:

Kathryn Sterner By Design Consultants, Inc. 1950 Market Street Camp Hill, PA 17011 Telephone: 717-540-1250 Fax: 717-540-0002 e-mail: [email protected]

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 01030-1

SECTION 01030 - BASE BID DESCRIPTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS

A. The specifications sections “General Conditions of the Construction Contract”, “Special Conditions”, and “Division 1 - General Requirements” form a part of this Section by this reference thereto, and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section includes identification of each Base Bid and description of the changes to be associated with each Base Bid.

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF SEPARATE BASE BIDS

A. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29 PHASE 1.1)

1. Base Bid No. 1:

a. Shall include all the work indicated on the Contract Drawings and described in the Contract Specifications, as Base Bid No. 1 work.

2. Base Bid No. 2:

a. Same as Base Bid No. 1, except add replacement of all exterior windows.

3. Base Bid No. 3:

a. Same as Base Bid No. 2, except add sealing and restriping parking lot and

replacement of all exterior man doors and overhead doors.

4. Base Bid No. 4:

a. Same as Base Bid No. 3. Additions occur as part of the HVAC and Electrical Contracts.

5. Base Bid No. 5:

a. Same as Base Bid No. 4, except add new interior doors as scheduled.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 01030-2

B. HVAC CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29 PHASE 1.2)

1. Base Bid No. 1:


2. Base Bid No. 2:

a. Same as Base Bid No. 1.

3. Base Bid No. 3:


4. Base Bid No. 4:

a. Same as Base Bid No. 3, except add replacement of the boiler and addition

of a gas-fired make-up air unit in the Maintenance Bay.

5. Base Bid No. 5:

a. Same as Base Bid No. 4. Additions occur as part of the General Construction Contract.

C. PLUMBING CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29 PHASE 1.3)

1. Base Bid No. 1:


2. Base Bid No. 2:


3. Base Bid No. 3:


4. Base Bid No. 4:


2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 01030-3

5. Base Bid No. 5:


D. ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29 PHASE 1.4)

1. Base Bid No. 1:


2. Base Bid No. 2:


3. Base Bid No. 3:


4. Base Bid No. 4:

a. Same as Base Bid No. 3, except add replacement of the emergency

generator.

5. Base Bid No. 5:


PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 1 01040-1

SECTION 01040 - COORDINATION AND CONTROL

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS


1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This section includes the on-site provisions that govern the performance of the work to complete this Project.

1.3 CONTRACTS - FOR THIS PROJECT CONSTRUCTION

A. DGS 962-29 PHASE 1.1 General Construction (Lead Contractor) B. DGS 962-29 PHASE 1.2 HVAC Construction C. DGS 962-29 PHASE 1.3 Plumbing Construction D. DGS 962-29 PHASE 1.4 Electrical Construction

1.4 VISIT TO SITE

A. For access to the site during the bidding period contact the Using Agency site personnel with phone number listed below:

1. Using Agency Site Representative: _____Ty Wagner____________________ 2. Telephone Number: ( _717__ ) __269-5421_______________________

1.5 UNIDENTIFIED HAZARDOUS MATERIALS (ASBESTOS, CHEMICALS, ETC.)

A. There is a possibility that hazardous materials not identified in the contract documents may be discovered on this project. Should it be determined that some or all of the hazardous materials must be removed, the Contractor shall obtain an estimate for said removal from a Subcontractor who is experienced in the field, has insurance and is knowledgeable of the regulations as they apply. The Contractor may provide the estimate itself if it is qualified in the applicable hazardous materials field. The Department shall consider authorizing a Change Order for the removal of the hazardous material to the extent necessary.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 1 01040-2

B. The Contractor or Subcontractor must comply with all requirements of the General Conditions, including the maintenance of insurance up to the limit required under the General Conditions.

C. Should a hazardous material be encountered on the job, the Contractor shall comply

with all statutes and regulations of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania and all rules and regulations of the United States Environmental Protection Agency as they apply during construction and demolition work and the disposal of hazardous material. Particular attention is drawn to Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Part 61, Section 112 of Clean Air Act and PA Department of Labor and Industry, Act 194 for asbestos.

D. The Contractor shall comply fully with the regulations of OSHA as they pertain to

the protection of workers exposed to the emission of asbestos fibers, chemicals, etc. and shall take all steps necessary to protect its employees, as well as all other people engaged in the building.

E. Whenever a hazardous material is to be removed or disposed of, the Contractor is

required to make proper notification to the Bureau of Air Quality Control in the Department of Environmental Protections' Regional Office, PA Department of Labor and Industry and EPA as applicable, and is required to obtain and pay for any permits required. Disposal shall conform to all applicable regulations and documentation shall be required when, applicable.

1.6 LEAD PAINT

A. All work is to be performed with the assumption that all painted surfaces are lead containing. Each Prime Contractor is responsible for following all required OSHA 1926.62 ‘Lead In Construction’ standards when disturbing or impacting these painted surfaces during the course of the renovations, including but not limited to activities such as: cutting and patching, core drilling, penetration, anchoring, fastening, etc. The area(s) shall be visually clean upon completion of any of these activities.

1. Action Plan: Contractor(s) shall submit an Action Plan that conforms to 1.6,

A. 1-3 herein, for approval at the Initial Job Conference, which specifically outlines details of means and methods to be used for each dust-generating activity involving lead-painted surfaces, erection of critical barriers and plastic sheeting for dust control, subsequent exposure assessment, personal protective equipment, hygiene and clean-up.

2. Contractor(s) shall utilize means and methods that preclude dust generation to complete work that disturbs/impacts lead-containing paint (i.e., paint stripper, HEPA-assisted drills, etc.).

3. Contractor(s) shall ensure areas beyond work area are not contaminated, and shall immediately stop work and erect plastic sheeting to prevent the spread of dust, anytime means and methods inadvertently create dust.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 1 01040-3

1.7 MOLD

A. In the event mold is encountered, the Contactor shall implement corrective actions to protect workers, other building occupants, and to prevent the disturbance of mold in affected areas. Although not presently regulated by EPA and/or OSHA, the EPA does provide industry standards regarding worker safety and abatement procedures, which are the minimum procedures to be followed if mold is encountered.

B. Any mold that appears as a result of construction shall be abated immediately by

the Contractor responsible for this condition. The affected surface shall be cleaned, removed, and replaced. Inspection and testing shall be done by a qualified testing agency to confirm the mold has been removed in its entirety.

1.8 TESTING OF EQUIPMENT

A. After any equipment furnished under the contract and any permanent heating, ventilating, plumbing, drainage or electrical systems and equipment have been installed or modified, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to operate its equipment for a satisfactory period of time, as required by the Department for proper testing and instructing the operating personnel. Fuel, electricity and water required for proper testing of permanent equipment and for the period of instructing personnel, shall be paid for by the Contractor testing its equipment.

1. 9 INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING

A. Refer to General Conditions Section 6.50 and 6.51, as specified in the applicable technical portion of each specification for "Operations and Maintenance Instruction Manuals” and “As-Built Drawing” requirements.

B. Unless approved by the Department, training shall not be scheduled/conducted until

As-Built Drawings, Operation and Maintenance Instruction Manuals, valve tag lists, equipment and piping system identification, and all software programming is complete.

C. Provide full on-site training and instruction to designated Commonwealth personnel

given by competent manufacturer's authorized personnel thoroughly familiar with all technical and operational aspects of the installed items. Instructions are to cover operation and maintenance of all systems, equipment components and other items as specified and furnished under this contract. Instructional video tapes may be used to augment required instructions and training but may not be substituted for the in person on-site training. All on-site training shall be video taped by the Contractor. The video tape(s) are to be given to the Department.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 1 01040-4

D. Contractor shall provide an outline of the training and course content, which shall be submitted and accepted by the Professional and the Department prior to conducting training.

E. Conduct instruction and training during regular working hours. For training on

complicated systems, allow at least one-half of the training time to be at and/or with the system equipment.

F. Provide additional training and instructions for all significant modifications and/or

changes made under the terms and/or conditions of the manufacturer's and/or Contractor's warranty.

G. The Contractor shall maintain and submit a sign-in list that clearly documents all

personnel attending the training. 1.10 PROJECT SIGN A. Provide project sign per General Conditions 19.1. 1.11 REUSE OF MATERIALS

A. No removed materials or equipment shall be reinstalled in the work, unless so noted on the Drawing or in these Specifications.

1.12 GENERAL

A. All construction trailers, offices, equipment and materials required to be on-site shall be located as shown on the Drawings, or at the direction of the Department.

1.13 WORKING HOURS

A. The Contractor's available working hours shall be from 7:00 A.M. to 4:00 P.M., Monday through Friday.

B. Work during different hours, or work on Saturdays, Sundays, State and National

Holidays or overtime work, must have the Regional Director's or his designee’s prior written approval.

C. This shall not apply in those unforeseen isolated and/or emergency instances when

a particular operation must be performed in a continuous sequence that extends the working day beyond the approved working hours. Coordinate with the Department in these instances.

D. The Department's failure to approve different working hours, weekend or holiday

working hours, or overtime hours is not cause for a claim against the Department for delay.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 1 01040-5

E. Utility shut-downs required for tie-ins to existing systems shall be done in off-

hours, weekends, and/or holidays to minimize the impact on the operations of the Using Agencies (and/ or surrounding buildings). Any utility shut-downs must be coordinated with the Using Agency. The Contractor shall provide a written request to the Using Agency a minimum of 72 hours prior to requested time of shut-down. Any shut-down costs shall be anticipated and included in the Contractor’s bid.

1.14 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Prefinished materials shall arrive at job site in their original unopened cartons or other protective packaging necessary to protect finishes. Materials should be stored in such packages until time of application. Flat materials such as panels shall arrive and remain on adequate support to ensure flatness and prevent damage.

B. Store all materials, equipment and bulk items prior to installation in clean, dry, well

ventilated locations away from uncured concrete, masonry or damage of any kind. Waterproof tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting must allow for air circulation under covering.

C. Coordinate storage location with the Department. D. Refer to each section for specific delivery, handling and storage instructions of

items specified. 1.15 PARKING

A. Parking shall be limited to areas indicated on the Site Plans. All parking is subject to prior approval of the Department and Using Agency.

1.16 TRAFFIC

A. The Lead Contractor shall establish at the Initial Job Conference a construction staging and traffic plan for the project which minimizes the construction interference with the Institution’s operation. This plan is subject to the Department’s and the Using Agency’s review and acceptance. This acceptance does not relieve the Contractors of their responsibilities regarding safety coordination, and adherence to all traffic laws and ordinances.

1.17 ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Prime Contractor and its Subcontractors shall perform their work in a manner which shall minimize the possibility of air, water, land and noise pollution, in accordance with General Conditions Section 6.38.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 1 01040-6

B. The name, address and telephone number of the Department of Environmental Protection Regional Office is furnished below. This office shall be contacted for waste disposal permits and for information concerning sites already approved for conducting waste disposal.

Southcentral Regional Office Counties: Adams, Bedford, Berks, Blair, 909 Elmerton Avenue Cumberland, Dauphin, Franklin, Harrisburg, Pa. 17110-8200 Fulton, Huntingdon, Juniata,

(717) 705-4700 (717) 705-4700 Lancaster, Lebanon, Mifflin, Perry, and York

1.18 OFFICE FOR CONTRACTOR

A. The Prime Contractor shall provide and maintain, at its cost, a suitable office on the premises, at a location shown on the Lead Contractor’s accepted staging plan. The Contractor shall provide and maintain heating facilities and supply fuel for same in cold weather, and shall remove the office from the premises at completion of all work. Provide electrical and telephone service.

1.19 DGS INSPECTOR'S OFFICE

A. The DGS Inspector’s office will be located within the existing building, as indicated on the sequencing plan.

B. Equipment: The Lead Contractor shall furnish the following items in the quantity indicated and remove same from the premises when directed by the Department. The Lead Contractor shall relocate the office contents two (2) separate times, including set-up and removal of office contents. The Lead Contractor shall maintain all items in good condition and furnish all supplies (i.e., toner, paper, bottled water, drinking cups) for the duration of the Contract. If any equipment fails, it shall be repaired or replaced by the Lead Contractor within twenty-four (24) hours of being notified by the Department.

1. __4__ Desks with swivel chairs 2. __1__ Electronic calculator with tape 3. __1__ Plans rack with 10 plan sticks 4. __0__ Plans table with two (2) stools 5. __2__ Four (4) drawer file cabinets, legal size and lockable 5.25 __15_ Stackable plastic file bins 5.5 100 ea. 11” x 17” hanging file folders and 3 tab manila folders 6. __0__ 12” deep shelving units of fifteen (15) lineal feet 7. __0__ Six (6) foot tables (three tables provided by Using Agency to be

---------moved by Lead Contractor) 8. __0__ Chairs (plastic folding) (fifteen chairs provided by Using Agency to be

---------moved by Lead Contractor)

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 1 01040-7

8.5 __4__ Rolling desk chairs 9. __0__ Clothes tree or closet with rod 10. __0__ FAX Machine, plain paper type 11. __1__ Desk-top copy machine, capable of copying up to 11” x 17” 12. __10_ Safety glasses 13. __0__ Two-way radios/phones 14. __2__ Fire Extinguisher 15. __1__ First-Aid Kit 16. __1__ Water cooler, with hot and cold taps 17. __2__ Telephones (cordless, with speaker phone capabilities), and answering machine 18. __0__ Copy of the applicable editions of the IBC codes 19. __3__ Trash cans 20. __1__ Indoor/Outdoor wireless thermometer

C. The DGS Inspector’s Office shall be equipped by the Lead Contractor with

telephone cabling and jacks to connect one (1) telephone voice line and one (1) independent facsimile machine line for use by DGS Personnel. The Lead Contractor shall provide up to four (4) modular telephone jacks (RJ-11 connectors) in the main office area. The Lead Contractor will install telephone cable to connect each jack to the demarcation point where the local telephone company provides service (utility pole, telephone room or other access point). The Lead Contractor shall place orders to the local telephone company to activate line service, and pay for the service and monthly charges.

1. The Lead Contractor shall provide one (1) data line connection for use with

the Department’s computer(s). The Lead Contractor shall provide an Internet service and pay all connections/disconnection and monthly fees. It shall be the Lead Contractor’s responsibility to ascertain the means in which the Internet source will be provided (Broadband, DSL, wireless are acceptable; dial-up is not acceptable.) The Internet source must be coordinated with the DGS Construction Inspector Supervisor to assure compatibility with the Department’s hardware/software requirements.

1.20 SMOKING POLICY

A. Smoking and use of smokeless-tobacco are strictly prohibited in all buildings.

1.21 CONCRETE AND EARTHWORK A. All Contractors shall perform concrete work and earthwork required for their work,

and shall comply with applicable Division 2 and 3 sections therefore. If any specification section contains language conflicting with requirements of applicable Division 2 and 3 sections, the most stringent requirements shall prevail.

1.22 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 1 01040-8

A. Structural-related testing and inspections required to be performed by the

Contractor(s) are listed in Section 01400 – Quality Control Testing Services. If Quality Control testing or inspections required appear in Section 01400 and in a technical section, the most stringent requirements shall prevail. If Quality Control testing or inspections required appear in a technical section and not in Section 01400, they shall be required as if specified in Section 01400. Conditions pertaining to Quality Control testing and inspections may appear in the technical sections. All testing herein is to be by the Contractor. Testing by the Department, Quality Assurance Testing, is for the purpose of checking the results of the Contractor’s Quality Control Testing. Testing is to be by the Contractor, unless specifically stated to be “by the Department” or required by Section 01401 – Quality Assurance Testing and Inspection Services.

B. Non-structural testing is in the technical specifications.


END OF SECTION

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

DGS 962-29 PHASE 1 01310-1

SECTION 01310 - SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION AND MILESTONES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS


1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Before beginning work, the Contractor will be required to prepare a schedule in consultation with the Department. The work must be carried out in full accordance with the schedule. The Contractor shall arrange to perform the work without any unnecessary interference with the Institution’s operation.

1.3 CRITICAL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor is cautioned that all necessary and required critical materials and equipment shall be ordered as quickly as possible, in order that the shipping will not delay the progress of the work or completion of the project.

1.4 CRITICAL ITEMS TO BE NOTED AS MILESTONES

A. Refer to the General Conditions, Article 8 ‘Project Schedule’, regarding construction progress Milestones to be established by the Lead Contractor.

B. The Contractor shall include the following critical items as Milestones:

1. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION (.1)

a. Roof replacement. b. Standing seam metal entrance canopy replacement. c. Patching and refurbishing entrance canopy stucco. d. Completion of Women’s Toilet & Shower renovations. e. Completion of Men’s Toilet & Shower renovations. f. Phase 1-A window replacement as part of Base Bid #2. g. Phase 1-B window replacement as part of Base Bid #2. h. Phase 1-A exterior door replacement as part of Base Bids #3 and #4. i. Phase 1-B exterior door replacement as part of Base Bids #3 and #4. j. Sealing and re-striping parking lot as part of Base Bids #3 and #4.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

DGS 962-29 PHASE 1 01310-2

2. HVAC CONSTRUCTION (.2)

a. Phase 1-A ductwork installation. b. Roof-top unit placement. c. Assembly Hall air handler replacement. d. Phase 1-B ductwork installation. e. Boiler replacement as part of Base Bid #4. f. Installation of make-up air unit in the Maintenance Bay.

3. PLUMBING CONSTRUCTION (.3)

a. Replacement of water heater and associated piping. b. Completion of Women’s Toilet & Shower renovations. c. Completion of Men’s Toilet & Shower renovations.

4. ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION (.4)

a. Relocation of IDF rack and equipment. b. Replacement of panelboard. c. Replacement of fire alarm system. d. Replacement of Assembly Hall light fixtures.

1.5 SEQUENCING OF CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS

A. During Sequence 1-A construction, the Using Agency will relocate all personnel and their office equipment to the west end of the building, occupying Conference Rm 140 and Physical Fitness 141. The DGS Inspector’s office will be located in Conference Rm 140. Furniture and equipment will be relocated by the Using Agency, and stored in the Assembly Hall while the east side of the building is being renovated. The renovations will include installation of the new HVAC system to include ductwork through Unit Equipment 137; replacement of windows (as included in Base Bids, #2, #3 and #4; renovation of the entrance canopy; and renovation of Shower 115 and Women’s 116. Men’s 118 will remain accessible and operational for the Using Agency’s use during Phase 1 construction. The new HVAC system will be installed and operational before the start of Phase 1-B construction.

B. During Sequence 1-B construction, the Using Agency will relocate to the east side

of the building, occupying all rooms to the east of and including Corridor 102. The DGS Inspector’s office will be located in Office 108. Phase 1-B renovations will include extending the ductwork to the west side rooms; replacement of windows (as included in Base Bids #2, #3 and #4; adding steel plates to the Arms Vault 136; HVAC and lighting replacement in the Assembly Hall; and renovation of Men’s 118 and Shower 119. Women’s 116 will remain accessible and operational for Using Agency’s use during Phase 1-B construction.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

DGS 962-29 PHASE 1 01310-3

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

DGS 962-29 PHASE 1 01400-1

SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL TESTING SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS

A. The specifications sections, " General Conditions of the Construction Contract ", "Special Conditions", and "Division 1 - General Requirements" form a part of this Section by this reference thereto, and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

1.2 GENERAL

A. The Contractor is responsible for verifying and enforcing compliance with all requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor's responsibility includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Supervision of field work to enforce contract compliance of all construction

activity. 2. Verification of compliance with plans and specifications of all manufactured

materials or equipment. Provide certificates of compliance, or other approved proof of compliance, by the manufacturers and submit to the Professional.

3. Performance of all necessary field measurements and/or inspections to verify compliance with requirements of the plans or specifications requiring adherence to measurable standards of field performance.

4. Engaging an independent testing laboratory to perform tests and inspections as required by this specification section, hereafter referred to as Quality Control Testing and Inspection Services or Quality Control Services.

5. Providing support services for all Quality Control Services, including cutting and patching and repair or replacement as required.

B. Work not included: Quality Assurance Services by the Department are specified in

Section 01401. The Department reserves the right to perform tests under the Quality Assurance Testing program and to use those as the basis for approval or rejection at its sole discretion.

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

A. Quality Control Services include inspections, tests and reports by an independent testing laboratory or other approved agency, hereafter referred to as a Quality Control Agency. All Quality Control Services shall be at the Contractor's cost, which shall be included proportionally in all items of payment or contained in any Base Bid or Unit Price on the Proposal.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

DGS 962-29 PHASE 1 01400-2

B. Quality Control Services by a Quality Control Agency or Agencies is intended to assist in the determination of probable compliance of the work with requirements specified or indicated and do not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements.

C. Specific testing or inspections of a structural nature required to be performed by

independent Quality Control Agencies for individual construction activities are specified in this Section only. If testing or inspection requirements appear in this section and a technical section, the most stringent requirements shall prevail. If Quality Control Testing or Inspection is specified in a technical section and not in this section, it shall be required as if specified in this section. Non-structural tests and inspections are in the technical specifications.

D. Inspections, tests and related actions specified are not intended to limit the

Contractor's quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Documents requirements.

E. Quality Control Services required by the local municipality or other governing

authorities are the responsibility of the Contractor, regardless of whether or not specified in the applicable specification section.

F. Each prime Contractor will pay for all costs in connection with its Quality Control

Services. Whenever the word "Contractor" is used it shall be interpreted to mean Prime Contractor or Contractors as applicable. All Contractors performing work for which testing or inspection is required by this section are required to perform said tests/inspections appropriate for the quantity of work performed as indicated by the List of Tests and Inspections and as required by the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES OF CONTRACTOR

A. The Contractor shall engage Quality Control Agencies to provide all Quality Control Services required to comply with the Contract Documents. These services shall be at no cost to the Department.

B. The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of required inspections,

tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and indicate non-compliance with Contract Document requirements. Likewise, the Contractor is responsible for retesting when the Department's Quality Assurance Test results prove unsatisfactory. If Quality Assurance Tests were in error, the Contractor shall be reimbursed for his retesting costs.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

DGS 962-29 PHASE 1 01400-3

C. Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by the Contractor is the

Contractor's responsibility. D. Provide the Quality Control Agency with preliminary representative samples of

materials to be tested in quantities requested. If the source, quality or characteristics of an approved material changes or indicates lack of compliance with Contract requirements, submit additional samples of materials to the Quality Control Agency.

E. When requested by the Professional, the Department, or the Quality Control

Agency, the Contractor shall immediately provide reports, cutting lists, material bills, shipping bills, time and place of shipment of materials to shop and field and any relevant data on previous testing and investigations of materials.

F. Provide casual labor and facilities:

1. To provide access to the work inspected or tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the site. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For security and protection of samples and test equipment at the project site.

G. To facilitate the timely sequence of inspection and testing, the Contractor shall give

advanced notification to the Quality Control Agency and the Department that work has progressed to a point where inspection and testing may proceed.

H. Contractor shall pay for additional cost of Quality Control Agency services which,

in the opinion of the Professional and the Department, are required because of the following:

1. Failure of materials or workmanship to meet Contract requirements. 2. Materials or practices not complying with the technical specifications which

could possibly result in defective and unacceptable work. 3. Changes in source, quality or characteristics of materials. 4. Site cured cylinders requested by the Contractor.

J. The Quality Control Agency shall submit a certified written report of each

inspection, test or similar service in duplicate to the Design Professional and the Department, with additional copies directly to any governing authority when that authority so directs. All reports shall be submitted within 24 hours of when the inspection, test or similar service was conducted.

K. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall

include, but not be limited to:

1. Date of issue.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

DGS 962-29 PHASE 1 01400-4

2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and location of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. 6. Designation of the Work and test method. 7. Identification of product and specification section. 8. Complete inspection or test data. 9. Test results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing. 11. Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested work

complies with Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of Quality Control Agency inspector.

L. Engage independent testing laboratories, whose employees assigned to the Project

and tests performed comply with ASTM E 329, Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. The testing laboratory must be accredited and audited by a qualified national authority. The Contractor is to submit the name and credentials of the proposed QC Agent to the Design Professional and the Department for acceptance.

M. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar activities, repair

the damaged work and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in the visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for "Cutting and Patching". Protect work exposed by or for Quality Control Testing activities, and protect repaired work.

3.2 RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES OF QUALITY CONTROL AGENCIES

A. Quality Control Agencies engaged to perform inspections, sampling and testing of materials and construction specified in individual specification sections shall cooperate with the Professional, the Department and Contractor in performance of its duties, and shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests. If it is determined by the Department that the personnel provided are not qualified or are not working in the best interests of the Project for the tests performed, the Contractor, through their Quality Control Agent, shall immediately replace or supplement the subject personnel.

B. Quality Control Agencies shall notify the Department, Professional and Contractor

promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3.3 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES TO BE PERFORMED

A. Testing and inspections by the Quality Control Agency or Agencies shall include, but are not limited to, the following list.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

DGS 962-29 PHASE 1 01400-5

LIST OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

DESCRIPTION OF TEST OR INSPECTION REFERENCED STANDARD

QUANTITY OR FREQUENCY

CONCRETE Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. (5 cylinders/test) Perform air tests when sampling concrete. Perform slump tests and record temperature for all concrete deliveries Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

ASTM C143, C1064, C231 or C173 or C138, C172, C31 C39

For each mix, 1 test for each day of concreting or for each 50cy, whichever is greater. For non-structural concrete, 1 test for each 100cy is adequate.

CAST STONE Absorption of Architectural Cast Stone ASTM C1195 1 Test

MASONRY Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry, Annex A7 Compressive Strength (3 cylinders/test) (Contractor makes cylinders.)

ASTM C 780 1 Test/5000 units of masonry for each mortar type.

Sampling and Testing Grout (3 cubes/test) (Contractor makes cubes)

ASTM C1019 1 Test/25 CY grout.

STRUCTURAL STEEL Welding AWS D1.1 Each field weld to be

visually observed. Footnotes- 1. Refer to Earthwork Section for additional details.

END OF SECTION

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 1 01401-1

SECTION 01401 -QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS


1.2 GENERAL

A. All testing and inspecting specifically called for and/or described in this section of the specifications are referred to as Quality Assurance Services and are the responsibility of the Quality Assurance Agency. Except as hereinafter specified, Quality Assurance Services will be performed without expense to the Contractor. The Quality Assurance Agency is an independent testing and inspecting agency engaged by the Department through the Professional. Testing required because of changes in materials or proportions at the request of the Contractor shall be at the Contractor's expense. The Professional may engage more than one Quality Assurance Agency to perform services. Whenever the word "Contractor" is used it shall be interpreted to mean Prime Contractor or Contractors as applicable.

B. Work Not Included: Quality Control Testing to be performed by the Contractor is

specified in Section 01400.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES OF THE CONTRACTOR

A. The use of Quality Assurance Services shall in no way relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to furnish materials and construction in full compliance with the plans and specifications or to perform Quality Control Testing where specified.

B. To facilitate Quality Assurance Inspection or Testing, the Contractor shall:

1. Secure and deliver to the project site, without cost, representative samples of materials it proposes to use and which are required to be tested under Paragraph 3.04, ‘Tests’.

2. Furnish such casual labor as is necessary to obtain and handle samples at the project or at other sources of material.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 1 01401-2

3. Provide means of safe access to work areas, provide conditions that allow testing and inspection to take place, provide materials for testing as requested, patch test sites when completed and furnish incidental labor and assistance necessary for inspectors of the Quality Assurance Agency to perform their tests and inspections.

3.2 AUTHORITY AND LIMITATIONS OF QUALITY ASSURANCE AGENCY

A. Personnel representing the Quality Assurance Agency will not act as foremen nor

perform other duties for the Contractor. B. Work will be checked as it progresses, but failure to detect any defective work or

materials shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered, nor shall it obligate the Department or the Professional for final acceptance.

C. The Quality Assurance Agency is not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge, or

release any requirements of the specifications, nor to approve or accept any portion of the work.

D. The Quality Assurance Agency shall report all test and inspection results to the

Professional, the Department and the Contractor immediately after they are performed. Selection and frequency of tests shall be at the discretion of the Professional and the Department.

E. Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall include but not be

limited to:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and location of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. 6. Designation of the Work and test method. 7. Identification of product and specification section. 8. Complete inspection or test data. 9. Test results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing. 11. Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested work

complies with Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of Quality Control Agency inspector.

F. When it appears that any material furnished or work performed by the Contractor

fails to fulfill contract requirements, the Quality Assurance Agency shall report such deficiency to the Professional, the Department and the Contractor.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 1 01401-3

3.3 CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO MEET CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS A. The Department and the Professional reserve the right to reject any items which do

not meet the requirements of the plans and specifications and will require the contractor to replace these items and bear all expenses in connection with such replacements.

B. The Contractor shall pay all costs incurred in providing additional testing and/or

analysis (including engineering fees) required because of deficient test results or construction not in compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents.

3.4 TESTS

A. Tests and inspections listed below may, at the discretion of the Professional and the

Department, be performed by an independent Quality Assurance Agency engaged by the Department through the Professional, without expense to the Contractor. The Department reserves the right to change this list at any time.

LIST OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS REQUIRED BY1

DESCRIPTION OF TEST OR INSPECTION

REFERENCED STANDARD

IBC REFER-ENCE

CONCRETE IBC Ch. 17 Special Inspection

Special Inspection required by IBC reference. 1704.4

DGS requirement Review Contractors’ design mixes, Certificates of Compliance and material test reports

DGS check test Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens ASTM C39

CAST STONE DGS check test Absorption of Architectural Cast Stone ASTM C1195 MASONRY IBC Ch. 17 Special Inspection

Special Inspection required by code for Level Inspection by IBC reference. 1704.5

DGS check test

Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry, Annex A7 Compressive Strength

ASTM C780

DGS check test Method of Sampling and Testing Grout ASTM C1019

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

D.G.S. 962-29 PHASE 1 01401-4

LIST OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS REQUIRED BY1

DESCRIPTION OF TEST OR INSPECTION

REFERENCED STANDARD

IBC REFER-ENCE

STEEL CONSTRUCTION IBC Ch. 17 Special Inspection

Special Inspection required by IBC reference. 1704.3

Footnotes- 1. “DGS check tests” are tests where the primary testing responsibility is Quality

Control Testing by the Contractor or no testing was specified or contemplated

END OF SECTION

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

DGS 962-29 PHASE 1 01500-1

SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS

A. The specifications sections “General Conditions of the Construction Contract”, “Special Conditions”, and “Division 1 - General Requirements” form a part of this Section by this reference thereto, and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

1.2 TEMPORARY SERVICES DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. The designated Contractor shall install, operate, protect and maintain the temporary services, as hereinafter specified, during the construction of the entire Project.

B. Temporary connections to new and/or existing permanent service lines shall be

made at locations as directed by the Department, in conjunction with the Using Agency (as applicable), and when the temporary service lines are no longer required, they shall be removed by the Contractor. Any part or parts of the permanent service lines, grounds and building, disturbed and damaged by the installation and/or removal of the temporary service lines, shall be restored to their original condition by the Contractor responsible for the temporary installation.

C. If the Contractor fails to carry out its responsibility in supplying temporary services

as set forth in this Contract, it is responsible for such failure, and the Department may take such action as it deems proper for the protection and conduct of the work, and shall deduct the cost involved from the amount due the Contractor. Only those temporary utilities required for construction need to be extended to the work area(s).

D. Temporary utilities for Prime Contractors’ office trailers shall be arranged and paid

for by each responsible Prime Contractor. The Lead Contractor shall arrange, provide, install, and pay for all temporary utilities required for the DGS office/ trailer.

1.3 TEMPORARY WATER SUPPLY

A. Water Service: Use water from the Using Agency’s existing water system without

metering and without payment of use charges.

1.4 TEMPORARY HEAT

A. Heat provided by the existing heating system, currently metered by the Using Agency, will be used in enclosed portions of the building. Fuel costs will be by the Using Agency.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

DGS 962-29 PHASE 1 01500-2

B. Temporary heat required in unenclosed portions of the building will be provided by

the General Contractor. Fuel costs will be by the General Contractor. C. A building or portion thereof shall be considered to be enclosed when (a) the roof is

on and tight; (b) the exterior walls have been completed; and (c) when openings, doors and windows are closed with permanent closures, or with substantial temporary closures which will affect the retention of heat within the building or portion thereof.

D. Prior to enclosure of the building or portions thereof, and when official local

weather predictions indicate below freezing temperatures or temperatures that may damage the work, each Contractor shall provide, maintain, operate and pay all costs, including fuel, for a sufficient number of approved portable heaters, so that the progress of its work is not impeded, and proper protection of its work from freezing is maintained. Self-contained fuel-fired portable heaters, if used, must be vented to the outside of the enclosed structure. Unvented fuel-fired portable heaters may be used only when the building is not enclosed.

E. After the building or portions thereof are enclosed, and temporary heat is required

for proper construction, the HVAC Contractor, at its own cost and expense, shall provide equipment and heating personnel for the temporary heat. The HVAC Contractor, may, with the Department’s approval, utilize the permanent system or portions thereof, or may install temporary steam or hot water radiation or convectors or a combination of both. The HVAC Contractor shall operate portable steam or hot water generating equipment for supply to permanent or temporary building heating facilities. The HVAC Contractor may install, operate, protect and maintain a temporary heating system through connections to existing steam or hot water lines.

F. The Using Agency will provide temporary heat, as required, for their areas of

occupancy during Phase 1-A Construction.

G. Temporary heating system, as hereinafter noted, shall be of sufficient capacity to heat the interior of the building to 60° F when outside temperature is 0° F. The interior temperature must be 60° F or above at all times. This service shall be continued until the entire Project is completed, except as hereinafter noted.

H. Where electricians or plumbers are required to install, operate supervise or maintain

equipment used in the provisions of temporary heat, the payment of the services of such material and personnel shall be the responsibility of the Electrical and the Plumbing Contractors respectively. It will be the responsibility of the Electrical and Plumbing Contractors to coordinate with the HVAC Contractor for temporary heat.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

DGS 962-29 PHASE 1 01500-3

I. The Lead Contractor shall pay for all fuel and electricity for the temporary heat in conjunction with the operation of heating equipment for enclosed buildings, or enclosed portions thereof, unless provided by the Using Agency as noted above.

J. The Lead Contractor shall remove normal soot, smudges, and other deposits from

walls, ceilings and exposed surfaces which are the result of the use of any temporary heating equipment after enclosure, including the use of the permanent heating system for temporary heating purposes. Finish work shall not start until all such surfaces are properly cleaned. Soot, etc. caused by equipment malfunction shall be removed by the responsible Contractor.

K. All permanent heating equipment used to supply temporary heat shall be completely

cleaned and reconditioned by the HVAC Contractor, in the presence of the Department personnel, prior to Final Acceptance. Cleaning of ducts may be required. The HVAC Contractor should filter the return air at grilles, and wherever necessary to prevent dust accumulation. All permanent heating equipment, such as radiator trap seats and diaphragms, valve sets and discs, strainer internals or any other equipment found to be damaged due to being used for temporary heat shall be replaced. All replacements must be checked and approved by the Department personnel. The HVAC Contractor shall pay for all replacement parts and labor.

L. The use of either temporary or permanent electric-resistance heating will not be

permitted for temporary heat. Where electric-resistance heating is specified, temporary heat shall be independent of the permanent system.

M. The cost of temporary heat shall be made a part of the lump sum bid submitted by

each Contractor, as applicable. The cost of temporary heat after enclosure shall be shown as the last item on the Contract Breakdown, Form GSC-30, to include the number of calendar days, cost per twenty-four (24) hour day and extended price. Any adjustment to the number of days of temporary heat, used or not used, will be based on this unit price. Each Contractor shall include 60 calendar days of temporary heat after building enclosure, in its bid.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION LIGHT AND POWER

A. Utilize electric power from the Using Agency’s existing system without metering and without payment charges.

B. Where lighting, power or service of a type other than what is existing is required,

each Contractor requiring same shall provide such service and necessary equipment at its own expense. All work must comply with NEC and OSHA. Connection to existing source shall be as determined by the Department.

2010 EDITION (Rev.)

DGS 962-29 PHASE 1 01500-4

1.6 WELDING

A. Any Contractor using electrical power for welding on the site shall use self-contained engine generating units.

1.7 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Each Contractor shall provide UL listed, NFPA approved fire extinguishers, ten (10) lb. minimum, at the construction site during operations, suitable for all types of fires in accordance with OSHA.

1.8 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICES

A. Each Prime Contractor shall have all needed equipment and material to complete planned work at the site, prior to shutting down any system.

B. No additional compensation or time will be given to the Contractor, if work must be

performed on State or National Holidays or on weekends or on overtime. See paragraph on ‘Working Hours’ under Section 01040.


END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 96229 Phase 1.1 02300 1

SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS

A. The specifications sections “General Conditions of the Construction Contract,” “Special

Conditions,” and “Division 1 – General Requirements” form a part of this Section by this

reference thereto, and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Preparing subgrades for pavements and lawns and grasses.

2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.

3. Subbase course for concrete pavements.

4. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to

support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hotmix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from offsite for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slabongrade that also minimizes upward capillary

flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and

dimensions indicated.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical

and electrical appurtenances, or other manmade stationary features constructed above or below

the ground surface.

D.G.S. 96229 Phase 1.1 02300 2

I. Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hotmix asphalt

pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement

concrete or hotmix asphalt walk.

J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or

backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

K. Utilities: Onsite underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground

services within buildings.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Using Agency or

others unless permitted in writing by Professional and then only after arranging to provide

temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

A. The Contractor shall perform all necessary Quality Control tests and procedures for the

performance of the work in accordance with Section 01400 and this section, to produce end

results specified. The Contractor shall maintain clear and orderly records of such tests and

procedures and make them available for field review and approval of the Professional and the

Department. The contractor’s bid shall include the cost of all Quality Control test.

B. The Contractor shall submit its plan for Quality Control testing to the Professional and the

Department for review and comments.

C. Quality Control tests shall include tests on fill material, optimum moisture content and

maximum density and field density tests of fill layers. The Q.C. Testing agent shall comment

on the suitability of all subgrades, and the subgrades shall be acceptable to the Q.A. agency.

D. Handwritten copies of field test reports shall be provided to the Contractor. They shall be given

to the Contractor and inspector within two (2) hours of completion, but in no event shall the

technician leave the site without providing the Contractor and inspector with a copy of the test

results. This shall include density, % moisture, plan location, elevation, comments and any

other relevant data. Comments shall include any condition that might have an adverse effect on

the operations, including weather, drainage, etc.

E. The Contractor shall request consultation with the Consulting Geotechnical Engineer on any

problems that arise during construction. Copies of the daily inplace soil density tests shall be

faxed to the consultant by the Contractor through the testing agency within twentyfour (24)

hours of the time the tests are made.

F. The Contractor shall approve each subgrade and each fill layer before proceeding to the next

layer. Any area which does not meet density, % moisture or other requirements at any time,

shall be suitably reworked and retested by the Contractor at his own expense.

G. The Professional and/or the Department will perform Quality Assurance tests in accordance

with Section 01401 deemed necessary for the assurance of the Professional and/or the

D.G.S. 96229 Phase 1.1 02300 3

Department. This does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities. The Department will

bear the cost of Quality Assurance tests.

H. Compaction standards are to be based on Modified Proctor standards, as defined by ASTM

D1557.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not

available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups SC, GC, GW, GP, GM, SW, SP,

and SM, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any

dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups , CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT

according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of

optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 11/2inch

sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 11/2inch


F. Imported Fill: Wellgraded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or

crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with less than 15% by weight rock fragments larger than 3” with

no particle size exceeding 6”, less than 30% by weight larger than the ¾” and less than 30%

smaller than the no. 200 sieve. Plasticity index < 10.0, liquid limit < than 30.0.

G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1inch


H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed

gravel; ASTM D 448; coarseaggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 11/2inch

sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid and alkaliresistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for

marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously

inscribed with a description of the utility.

D.G.S. 96229 Phase 1.1 02300 4

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork

operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earthwork operations.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation for this Project shall be considered unclassified and shall

include all types of earth and soil, any pebbles, boulders, and bedrock, municipal trash, rubbish

and garbage and all types of debris of the construction industry such as wood, stone, concrete,

plaster, brick, mortar, steel and iron shapes, pipe, wire, asphaltic materials, paper and glass.

Unclassified excavation does not include unforeseen concrete foundations, walls or slabs. All

such materials encountered which are identified by this paragraph as unclassified shall be

removed to the required widths and depths to create a finished product as shown and/or noted

on the drawings and as written in the specifications. No additional compensation shall be made

to the contractor for this unclassified excavation. The materials defined by this paragraph as

unclassified will not be considered to be concealed conditions or unknown physical conditions

below the surface of the ground for purposes of interpreting the language in the General

Conditions of the Construction Contract.

3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If

applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing

concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.

Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim

bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility

Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or

minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and

subgrades.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

D.G.S. 96229 Phase 1.1 02300 5

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or

conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of

pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of

pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of

pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp

objects along trench subgrade.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding

bearing material, 4 inches deeper elsewhere, to allow for bedding course.

3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. The Contractor shall furnish adequate advance notification to the Department and the

Professional of times when footing excavations are to be completed, so that the bearing quality

of bottoms may be inspected and/or tested and approved. Form work and concreting shall

follow only after this approval.

B. Should the bearing at the levels indicated be found by the Professional and the Department to be

inadequate, they may order the excavation shall be classed as additional work and payment be

made on the basis of an agreed price according to the General Conditions. Should suitable

bearing be found at a lesser depth than indicated, the Professional and the Department may

order the reduction of excavation specified or shown on the drawings, and the Contractor shall

allow a credit for excavation thus omitted on the same basis.

C. Proofroll subgrade below pavements and structures with a vibratory roller (10 ton minimum

static weight) to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proofroll wet or

saturated subgrades.

D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or

construction activities, as directed by Professional, without additional compensation.

3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation

of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean

concrete fill, with 28day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by

Professional.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by

Professional.

3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.

Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

D.G.S. 96229 Phase 1.1 02300 6

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of

remaining trees.

3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding

course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,

fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with

satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.

D. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any

dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both

sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or

displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

E. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

F. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches

below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.10 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill

material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use onsite soil material.

2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.

3. Under steps and ramps, use satisfactory soil material.

4. Under building slabs, use satisfactory soil material.

5. Under footings and foundations, use satisfactory soil material.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before

compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain

frost or ice.

D.G.S. 96229 Phase 1.1 02300 7

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that

exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified

dry unit weight.

3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material

compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for

material compacted by handoperated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and

uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight

according to ASTM D1557:

1. Under structures and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing

subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 100 percent.

2. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and

compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 100 percent.

3. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 100

percent.

3.13 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply

with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish

subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.

2. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

3.14 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES

A. Place subbase course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course under pavements and walks as follows:

1. Shape subbase course to required crown elevations and crossslope grades.

2. Compact subbase course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross

sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according

to ASTM D 1557.

D.G.S. 96229 Phase 1.1 02300 8

3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Contractor to engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing

agency to perform field qualitycontrol testing.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with

subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with

requirements.

C. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,

ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 6938, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable.

D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of

compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth

required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.16 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep

free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed

surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent

construction operations or weather conditions.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,

backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,

and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.17 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,

trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Using Agency's property.

END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 96229 Phase 1.1 027511

SECTION 02751 – CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS

A. The specifications sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and

Division 1 General Requirements” form a part of the section by this reference thereto, and shall

have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Curbs.

2. Walks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended

hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blastfurnace slag.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product, ingredient, or admixture requiring color

selection.

C. Other Action Submittals:

1. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures

when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other

circumstances warrant adjustments.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.

3. Admixtures.

4. Curing compounds.

5. Joint fillers.

D.G.S. 96229 Phase 1.1 027512

B. Material Test Reports: For each of the following:

1. Aggregates. Include servicerecord data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of

concrete due to alkaliaggregate reactivity.

C. Field qualitycontrol reports.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. ReadyMixConcrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready

mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for

production facilities and equipment.

B. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform material evaluation tests

and to design concrete mixtures.

C. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other

construction activities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metalframed plywood, or other approved paneltype

materials to provide fulldepth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet or less. Do

not use notched and bent forms.

B. FormRelease Agent: Commercially formulated formrelease agent that will not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of

concrete surfaces.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. PlainSteel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from galvanized steel wire

into flat sheets. Galvanize in accordance with ASTM A123 with a coating grade consistent with

the measured wire diameter of the fabric.

D.G.S. 96229 Phase 1.1 027513

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and

source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, gray portland cement.

B. NormalWeight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single.

1. Maximum CoarseAggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal.

2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.

D. AirEntraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent watersoluble chloride ions by mass of

cementitious material.

2.4 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry or cotton mats.

B. MoistureRetaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlappolyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application

to fresh concrete.

E. Clear, Waterborne, MembraneForming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,

dissipating.

F. White, Waterborne, MembraneForming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B,

dissipating.

2.5 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphaltsaturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self

expanding cork in preformed strips.

B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene

butadiene.

C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, twocomponent epoxy resin capable of humid curing

and bonding to damp surfaces; of class suitable for application temperature.

D.G.S. 96229 Phase 1.1 027514

2.6 DETECTABLE WARNING MATERIALS

A. Detectable Warning: Semirigid polyurethane mats or tray to be secured within concrete

pavement..

1. Size: One piece matching detectable warning area shown on Drawings.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of

normalweight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field

experience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete

design mixtures for the trial batch method.

2. When automatic machine placement is used, determine design mixtures and obtain

laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements.

B. Proportion mixtures to provide normalweight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3500 psi.

2. Water Cement Ratio: 0.47

3. Air Content: 6% in plastic state (+/1.5 %)

C. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. ReadyMixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to

ASTM C 94. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F , reduce mixing and delivery time from

11/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and

delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for

dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proofroll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of

excess yielding.

1. Completely proofroll subbase in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.

2. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2

inch.

D.G.S. 96229 Phase 1.1 027515

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines,

grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can

remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with formrelease agent to ensure separation from concrete

without damage.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and

supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bondreducing materials.

C. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least

one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous

laps in either direction.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with

faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to

centerline unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed

joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at

locations where paving operations are stopped for more than onehalf hour unless paving

terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do

not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed jointfiller strips abutting concrete curbs,

catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.

D.G.S. 96229 Phase 1.1 027516

2. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if

joint sealant is indicated.

3. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not

indicated.

4. Furnish joint fillers in onepiece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or

clip jointfiller sections together.

5. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other

temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both

sides of joint.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakenedplane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as

indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth of the concrete

thickness, as follows, to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete paving:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing

each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction

joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groovingtool marks on concrete

surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof

abrasive or diamondrimmed blades. Cut 1/8inchwide joints into concrete when cutting

action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random

contraction cracks.

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an

edging tool to a 1/4inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.

Eliminate edgingtool marks on concrete surfaces.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and

items to be embedded or castin.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before placing

concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not

place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and

alignment.

D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh

concrete after testing.

F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or

drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented

by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

D.G.S. 96229 Phase 1.1 027517

H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an opentextured and uniform

surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further

disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

J. Curbs and Gutters: Use design mixture for formed placement. Produce curbs and gutters to

required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.

K. ColdWeather Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that

could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the

following:

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat

water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less

than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.

L. HotWeather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hotweather conditions

exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time

of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature,

provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using

liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with watersoaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed

ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fogspray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep

subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.7 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleedwater sheen has disappeared and

concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with powerdriven

floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true

planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular

texture.

1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across floatfinished concrete,

perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture.

3.8 DETECTABLE WARNINGS

A. Detectable Warnings: Install detectable warnings as part of a continuous concrete paving

placement and according to stampmat manufacturer's written instructions.

D.G.S. 96229 Phase 1.1 027518

3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for coldweather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy

conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing

operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and

bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete

surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moistureretainingcover curing, curing

compound, or a combination of these.

3.10 PAVING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 3/4 inch.

2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch.

3. Surface: Gap below 10footlong, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch.

4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches.

5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.

6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM

C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 5000 sq. ft. or fraction

thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not

less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests

when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not

less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F

and below and when it is 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; cast and laboratory cure one set of three

standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

D.G.S. 96229 Phase 1.1 027519

6. CompressiveStrength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one specimen at seven days and two

specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressivestrength test shall be the average compressive strength from two

specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.

C. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive

compressivestrength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no

compressivestrength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500

psi.

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Professional, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor

within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressivestrength tests shall contain Project

identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and

inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days,

concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break

for both 7 and 28day tests.

E. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when

test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements

have not been met, as directed by Professional.

F. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

H. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.12 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not

comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint

unless otherwise approved by Professional.

B. Drill test cores, where directed by Professional, when necessary to determine magnitude of

cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland

cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after

placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by

removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep

paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.

END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 03300-1

SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS

A. The specifications sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and “Division 1 – General Requirements” form a part of this section by this reference thereto, and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. The work within this section includes, but is not limited to, the furnishing of all equipment, labor and materials and performing all operations necessary to complete the concrete work as specified in accordance with the specifications, applicable drawings and Contract Documents.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of

materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared

according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results

for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials:

1. Concrete Materials. 2. Design Mixes.

E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items

complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Form materials and form-release agents. 3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 4. Admixtures.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 03300-2

5. Curing materials. 6. Floor and slab treatments. 7. Bonding agents. 8. Adhesives. 9. Vapor retarders. 10. Epoxy joint filler. 11. Joint-filler strips. 12. Repair materials.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar

in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete

products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are

indicated:

1. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 2. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." 3. ACI 305, “Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting.” 4. ACI 306, “Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting.” 5. ACI 318, “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.” 6. ACI 347, “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.” 7. CRSI, “Manual of Standard Practice”.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

1.6 UNDERSTRENGTH CONCRETE

A. If structural members are accepted on the basis of tests other than the original cylinder tests, the .1 Contractor shall compensate DGS for the .1 Contractor’s failure to meet specified strength requirements by paying the Department one hundred ($100) dollars per cubic yard for each one hundred pounds per square inch below the specified strength. The original laboratory-cured 28 day test cylinder results only shall be used to determine the difference between specified and furnished strengths.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 03300-3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and

smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,

and as follows: a. High-density overlay, Class 1, or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1, or better, mill-release agent treated and edge

sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed.

D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to

resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1-1/2 inch to the plane of the

exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in

concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing

or waterproofing. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed. B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat

sheets. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and

fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 03300-4

to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use

CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base

material will not support chair legs. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows:

2. Class: Severe weathering region, but not less than 3S. 2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch.

C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-

soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.

B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder that is resistant to deterioration when tested according

to ASTM E 154, as follows:

1. Polyethylene sheet not less than 6 mils thick.

2.8 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 03300-5

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene

sheet. C. Water: Potable. D. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid-type membrane-forming curing

compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. A minimum of 18 percent solids, be non-yellowing, and have a unit moisture loss of less than 0.039 gm/cm2 maximum at 72 hr when applied at 200 sq ft/gal.

E. Water-Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B. Provide

material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L.

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene

butadiene. B. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid

curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Type: Class IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to

hardened concrete.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory

trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301.

B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs

for the laboratory trial mix basis. C. Concrete strength: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:

1. As indicated on drawings.

D. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as

follows: 1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches. 2. Concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Not more

than 8 inches after adding admixture to site-verified 2-3-inch slump concrete. 3. Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 03300-6

E. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus 1 or minus 1.5 percent, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch- nominal maximum aggregate size. 2. Air Content: 6 percent for 1-inch- nominal maximum aggregate size. 3. Air Content: 6 percent for 3/4-inch- nominal maximum aggregate size.

F. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floors. Do not allow entrapped air content

to exceed 3 percent.

J. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.10 percent by weight of cement.

K. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer)

in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete required to be watertight,

and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixes where indicated.

2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.12 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from

1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,

lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 03300-7

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch, for concrete surfaces exposed to view including interior tank wall

surfaces. 2. Class C, 1/2 inch, for other concrete surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required

elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork

is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads

required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and

other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and

maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install waterstops as required. Hold waterstop in position to prevent movement during

concrete placement.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 03300-8

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that

does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.

C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or

otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.

Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Engineer.

3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643

and manufacturer's written instructions. B. General: Place vapor retarder/barrier sheeting in position with longest dimension parallel with

direction of pour. C. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer’s recommended mastic or pressure-sensitive

tape. 3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before

placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 03300-9

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at

locations indicated or as approved by the Professional.

1. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

C. Contraction (control) Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,

sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing

each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inchwide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Dowel Joints: Install dowel bar and support assemblies at joints where indicated.

1. Lubricate one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. General: Comply with ACI 304, “Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing

Concrete,” and as specified. B. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded

items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement. D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be

placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

E. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers of 12 to 24 inches deep and in a manner to avoid

inclined construction joints. It should not be allowed to drop freely more than 4 ft. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and

procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 03300-10

consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate.

F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of

construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

G. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from

physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F , uniformly heat

water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.

H. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as

follows, when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time

of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed

to view in the finished work or concealed by other construction. As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smooth-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces exposed

to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete. As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 03300-11

a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch in height. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, inside of tank walls, or to be covered

with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, or painting.

2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and

finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-

floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor

topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small

or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to floor

and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by

hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view

or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to ASTM E 1155 for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness, F(L) 20; with

minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and levelness, F(L) 15.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 03300-12

E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with

fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or

windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported

slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following methods:

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed

surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the

following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 03300-13

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive

penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining

cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor coverings.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a

continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.13 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid epoxy joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by the Professional.

Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to the Professional's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two

and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 03300-14

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than

1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by the Professional.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and

verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

6. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer's approval, using epoxy adhesive and

patching mortar.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 03300-15

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to the Professional's

approval. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample

materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article.

B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Refer to Section 01400. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not

less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. a. Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite

sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days

and two at 28 days. a. Test two field-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two

specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. C. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured

cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

D. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive

compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor

within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days,

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 03300-16

concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests.

F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be

permitted by Engineer but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when

test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Engineer. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Engineer.

END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 04200-1

SECTION 04200 - MASONRY PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS A. The specification sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and

“Division 1 – General Requirements” form a part of this section by reference thereto, and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

1.2 SCOPE A. Provide unit masonry for walls and partitions: 1. Cavity wall construction consisting of Concrete Masonry Units back-up, extruded

polystyrene cavity insulation and veneer that meets the Energy Performance requirements of SPiRiT requirements for “Energy and Atmosphere” and the applicable building codes.

2. Concrete masonry bearing walls and non-bearing partitions. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. The publications referenced below establish minimum requirements for materials, systems and execution which may be specified in this Section.

ACI INTERNATIONAL (ACI)

ACI SP-66 ACI Detailing Manual ACI 530 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

ASTM A82 Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A153/A153M Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A615/A615M Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement ASTM C55 Concrete Brick ASTM C62 Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay

or Shale) ASTM C67 Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile ASTM C90 Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units ASTM C91 Masonry Cement ASTM C126 Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing

Brick, and Solid Masonry Units ASTM C129 Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units ASTM C140 Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 04200-2

ASTM C216 Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale)

ASTM C270 Mortar for Unit Masonry ASTM C476 Grout for Masonry ASTM C494/C494M Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C578 Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation ASTM C641 Staining Materials in Lightweight Concrete Aggregates ASTM C652 Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay

or Shale) ASTM C744 Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units ASTM C780 Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars

for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry ASTM C1019 Sampling and Testing Grout ASTM C1072 Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength ASTM D2000 Rubber Products in Automotive Applications ASTM D2240 Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness ASTM D2287 Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer

Molding and Extrusion Compounds ASTM E119 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials

1. Brick Industry Association Technical Notes on Brick Construction

2. National Concrete Masonry Association TEK Concrete Masonry Technical Bulletins

1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Loose steel lintels are specified in Section 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS. B. Joint sealers are specified in Section 07900 - JOINT SEALERS. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s product data for the following: a. Colored masonry cement. b. Each masonry accessory. c. Each type of masonry unit. B. Samples: 1. Submit samples for the following: a. Colored masonry mortar for each color required showing full range expected in

completed work. b. Each masonry accessory.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 04200-3

c. Each type of exposed masonry unit required; include in each set the full range of color and texture expected in completed work.

C. Material Certificates: 1. Submit material certificates (signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each

material complies with or exceeds specified requirements) for the following: a. Each cement product required for mortar and grout. Include name of manufacturer,

brand, type, and weight. b. Each type and size of joint reinforcement. c. Each type and size of anchors, ties, and metal accessories. D. Steel Products Procurement Act Certification: 1. Submit certification for steel products used in the Project pursuant with the provisions of

the Steel Products Procurement Act (ACT of 1978, March 3, P.L. 6, No. 3 1-7) (73. P.S. 1881-87) which, in part, requires that if any steel products are to be used or supplied in the performance of a contract, only steel products, as defined by the ACT, that are made in the United States may be used.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. Comply with applicable provisions of the following except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: a. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA). b. Brick Institute of America (BIA). c. ACI 530/530.1 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures and

Specifications for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries as amended to date.

B. Single Source Responsibility: 1. Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from

one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate.

2. Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or uniform blend within ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one manufacturer for each product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces.

C. Fire Performance Characteristics: 1. Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those assemblies whose

fire endurance has been determined by testing in compliance with ASTM E 119 by a recognized testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 04200-4

D. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with applicable provisions of Section 01040. B. Store cementitious materials off ground, under cover, in a dry location. C. Store masonry accessories to prevent deterioration due to extremes of temperature and

exposure to the elements. D. Deliver masonry units to Project site in undamaged condition. Store and handle masonry units

to prevent deterioration or damage. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Work: 1. During erection, cover tops of walls with waterproof sheeting at end of each work day.

Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. a. Extend cover minimum 24 inches down both sides and anchor securely in place. b. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 24 hours after building

masonry walls or columns. c. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 7 days after building masonry or

columns. B. Staining: 1. Prevent mortar, grout, or other substances from staining masonry faces indicated to be

"exposed" or painted in the finished Work. Immediately remove splashed, spilled, dropped, or similarly transferred mortar and grout residue from exposed masonry surfaces.

a. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter using ground cloths or other approved means.

b. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. C. Environmental Conditions: 1. Do not lay masonry when air temperature is below 40 degrees F. 2. Hot Weather Construction a. Enact hot weather construction procedures when ambient air temperature exceeds

100 degrees F or when ambient temperature exceeds 90 degrees F with a wind velocity greater than 8 miles per hour.

b. When conditions are unseasonably hot, dry, and windy, the Department may require that hot weather construction procedures be initiated prior to the occurrence of temperature or temperature/wind conditions specified in paragraph a. above.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 04200-5

c. Store masonry materials in shaded area. Dark colored masonry materials require full protection from direct and reflected sunlight.

d. Maintain sand in a damp, loose condition. Sprinkle sand with water periodically to maintain moist condition. Cover stock pile to maintain consistent moisture content.

e. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout below 120 degrees F. When mixing mortar or grout, use cool mix water. Mix water may be cooled with ice provided ice is completely melted prior to adding water to mortar or grout materials.

1) Mix smaller batches of to minimize drying time on the boards. 2) Mix mortar with sufficient water to maintain workability and compensate for evaporation. 3) Mix mortar for no longer than 5 minutes. 4) Retemper with cool water to reduce mortar temperature. f. Use mortar within 2 hours of mixing. g. Flush mortar boards, mortar pans, and wheelbarrows with water just prior to use. h. Spread mortar bed joints not more than 4 feet ahead of masonry to minimize surface

drying. i. Immediately following completion of a days' work, protect wall surfaces from rapid

evaporation by water fog spraying or covering with plastic, canvas, or damp burlap. 1) Do not use high-pressure water for spraying. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU) A. General: Comply with Reference Standards and requirements specified herein. 1. Provide units complying with characteristics indicated for grade, compressive strength,

and weight classification. 2. Provide special shapes where required for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints,

headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 3. If special shapes are not available due to manufacturing limitations, fabricate special

shapes from standard units by sawing units and adhering together with epoxy adhesive. 4. Use bullnose units at exposed corners where indicated on the Drawings. 5. Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 inches long by

8 inches (15 5/8 inches x 7 5/8 inches actual) by thickness indicated on Drawings. B. Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units 1. ASTM C 90, Grade N. 2. Type I, moisture-controlled. 3. Compressive strength: 1900 psi. 4. Weight classification: Normal. C. Solid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units 1. ASTM C 145, Grade N. 2. Type I, moisture controlled.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 04200-6

3. Compressive strength: 1800 psi. 4. Weight classification: Normal. D. Non Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units 1. ASTM C 145, Grade N 2. Type I, moisture controlled. 3. Compressive strength: 1900 psi. 4. Weight classification: Lightweight E. Concrete Building Brick 1. ASTM C 55. 2. Compressive strength: 3500 psi. 3. Weight classification: Normal. F. Precast Concrete Masonry Lintels 1. Factory-molded, reinforced concrete masonry lintels with 7 5/8 inch face height.

Texture, color, and overall appearance to match modular concrete masonry units. 2.2 BRICK MADE FROM CLAY OR SHALE A. General: Comply with Reference Standards and requirements specified herein. 1. Size: Provide brick with face dimensions to match existing. 2. Provide special molded shapes where indicated and as follows: a. For applications requiring brick of form, size, and finish at exposed surfaces where

standard brick sizes cannot be utilized. 3. Sawing brick to form mitered corners is not permitted. 4. Provide uncored or unfrogged units with all exposed surfaces finished. B. Facing Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade A, Type FBS ( modular). 1. Compressive Strength: 8000 psi average per ASTM C 67. 2. Size: Manufactured to the following actual dimensions: a. Utility: 3 5/8 inches wide by 3 5/8 inches high by 11 5/8 inches long. 3. Texture/Color a. Field Brick: Equal to St. Simon Blend A as manufactured by The Belden Brick

Company. 4. Manufacturers: The Belden Brick Company Glen Gery Brick, custom color to match existing Old Castle Brick, custom color to match existing or equal as approved by the Professional

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 04200-7

2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold weather

construction. Provide natural color or white cement to produce desired mortar color. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. For colored pigmented mortars use premixed colored

masonry cements formulated to produce desired color. 1. Color: To be selected by the Design Professional from manufacturer's standard range. 2. Manufacturer: Flamingo Color Masonry Cement by Riverton Glen Gery Color Mortar York Building Products, Workrite or equal as approved by the Professional 3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 4. Sand: ASTM C 144, except grading shall comply with BIA M1-72. a. Color: To be selected by the Design Professional. 5. Mortar Admixture: Dry-Block Mortar Admixture by Grace Construction Products or

equal as approved by the Professional. 6. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4 inch wide use

aggregate graded with 100% passing a No. 16 sieve. 7. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. 8. Water: Drinkable. 2.3 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Hot-dip galvanized welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and

plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, widths to fit all thicknesses indicated, with prefabricated corner and tee units.

1. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch diameter. 2. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch diameter. B. At single-wythe and multi-wythe masonry, provide truss design with single pair of side rods

and diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches on centers. C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide joint reinforcement by one

of the following: Heckman Building Products, Inc. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Wire-Bond – Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America or equal as approved by the Professional 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ANCHORS A. General: Fabricate from 16 gauge steel sheet or 3/8 inch steel rod, 1.5 oz. hot-dip zinc coated

after fabrication.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 04200-8

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized Wire: ASTM A 82 for uncoated wire, ASTM A 123 for zinc coating applied after fabrication.

2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: Carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to

comply with ASTM A 153, Class 5. 3. Adjustable Eye-Wire Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Provide two-piece assemblies that

allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

2.5 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A563

hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter, length, and configuration shown.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES A. Premolded Control Joints: Extruded synthetic rubber compound conforming to ASTM D

2000, minimum durometer hardness of 70, sizes and profiles indicated on the Drawings; B. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D1056, Grade 2A1;

compressible up to 35 percent of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene. C. Plastic Weep Hole/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene

copolymer, designed to fill head joint with outside face held back 1/8 inch from exterior face of masonry, in color selected from manufacturer’s standard.

D. Cavity Drainage Material: ¾ inch thick, free-draining mesh made from polyethylene strands

and shaped to avoid being clogged by mortar droppings. E. Concealed Flashings: Stainless Steel Flashing: Single sheet of 304 stainless steel bonded on

one side to a layer of polymeric fabric. F. Mastic/Sealant: One part 100% solids, solvent-free formulated silyl-terminated polyether

(STPE), ASTM C920-11, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50. G. Termination Bar: Flashing manufacturer’s standard 1” composite material bar or 1”, 26 gauge

stainless steel termination bar with sealant lip. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Primer Paint: FS TT-P-86, Type II or SSPC-Paint 2. B. Dry block Additive

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 04200-9

2.8 DOWEL BARS A. All dowel bars to comply with PennDOT Specifications 408/2003, Section 709.1. 2.9 MASONRY CLEANER A. Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate (1/2 cup dry measure) and

laundry detergent (1/2 cup dry measure) dissolved in one gallon of water. 1. For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains, use a liquid formulation consisting of

organic and inorganic acids and special inhibitors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use color pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water

repellent agents, anti-freeze compounds, or other admixtures unless specifically approved by the Department.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious materials, water, and aggregates in a

mechanical batch mixer; comply with referenced ASTM standards for mixing time and water content.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of

mortar required unless indicated otherwise. 1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement-lime. 2. For masonry below grade in contact with earth, use Type M. 3. For exterior, above grade loadbearing and non-loadbearing walls and for interior

loadbearing walls, use Type S. 4. For interior non-loadbearing walls use Type N. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 and referenced unit masonry standards. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine job conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping, conduit,

ductwork, and similar components.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 04200-10

C. Inspect construction elements affecting installation of unit masonry including concrete, structural steel, non-masonry backup, and similar construction. Observe conditions potentially detrimental to installation and performance of unit masonry.

D. Do not proceed with unit masonry work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Except where more stringent requirements are specified, install unit masonry in compliance

with Reference Standards. B. Cleaning Joint Reinforcement: Before placing, remove loose rust, ice, and other coatings from

reinforcement. C. Wall Thickness: Build masonry walls to full thickness shown on Drawings. Build single

wythe walls and partitions to actual thickness of masonry units using units of nominal thickness indicated.

D. Build chases and recesses as shown or required for work of other trades. Provide not less than

8 inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses.

E. Leave toothed openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry work.

After installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match masonry adjacent to opening. F. Where metal frames or other devices scheduled to be built into masonry are not available for

installation, leave toothed opening at least 16 inches greater in width to accommodate unit. When frame or other device is set in place, extend masonry to interface with unit as detailed. Fill CMU jamb units solid with mortar where indicated.

G. Cut masonry units using motor-driven saw to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units

as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work. Use full-size units where possible.

1. Cut concrete masonry units with a dry cutting saw. H. Dry-brush masonry work at end of each work day. I. Protect newly laid masonry from exposure to precipitation, excessive drying, freezing, soiling,

backfill, and other harmful conditions. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines, walls, and column surfaces, do not exceed 1/4" in 10'

or 3/8" in 20' or 1/2" in 40' or more. At external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in 20' or 1/2" in 40' or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or minus 1/4" in 10' or 1/2" maximum overall.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 04200-11

B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" across any bay or 20' maximum or 1/2" in 40' or more. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8" between adjacent floor elements in 10' or 1/16" within width of a single unit.

C. Variation of Linear Building Line: Do not exceed 1/2" in any bay or 20' maximum. Do not

exceed 3/4" in 40' or more. D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, do not exceed

minus 1/4" or plus 1/2" from dimensions shown. E. Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by more than

plus or minus 1/8" with a maximum face thickness of 1/2". Do not exceed head joint face thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8".

3.5 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Layout masonry walls in advance to ensure accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with

uniform joint widths and to accurately locate openings, control joints, expansion joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid use of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations.

B. Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances. Space courses accurately and

coordinate with installation of other work. C. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in bond pattern shown or, if not shown, lay in running

bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches.

1. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. 2. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimension at corners or

jambs. D. Do not wet concrete masonry units. E. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2-unit length at each course; do not tooth. Clean

exposed surfaces of set masonry. Wet units lightly (if specified to be wetted). Remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.

F. Built-in Work: As the work progresses, build-in items shown on Drawings and specified in

various Sections of the Specifications. 1. Metal Frames a. At metal door frames, position 3 anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. b. Except at wrap-around metal frames, butt masonry units tightly against frame

returns. c. As masonry progresses vertically, fill hollow metal frame profiles solid with mortar

unless indicated otherwise.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 04200-12

2. Where built-in items are embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, install a layer of metal lath in the horizontal joint directly below and rod mortar or grout into core.

G. Unless indicated otherwise, fill cores in hollow masonry units solid with grout 3 courses (24

inches) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items. 3.6 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joint. Butter ends of

masonry units with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints.

B. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face

shells. Bed webs in mortar at starting course on footings and at all courses of piers, columns, pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread full mortar bed including areas under cells.

C. Maintain joint widths shown except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. Where joint widths are not indicated, lay walls with 3/8 inch wide joints. D. At masonry surfaces scheduled to be concealed or to be covered with other materials, strike

joints flush unless indicated otherwise. E. Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness. F. Collar Joints at Multi-Wythe Masonry: After each course is laid, infill gap between wythes

solidly with mortar at the following applications: 1. Interior partitions. 2. Foundation walls. 3.7 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install continuous horizontal joint reinforcement at single-wythe and multi-wythe

concrete masonry unit (CMU) walls and partitions as indicated on Drawings. Position reinforcement units to allow minimum 1/2 inch mortar cover over side rods. Lap reinforcing minimum 6 inches.

B. Space continuous horizontal reinforcement as follows: 1. For single-wythe walls, space reinforcement 16 inches on centers vertically unless

indicated otherwise. C. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless indicated otherwise.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 04200-13

D. At corners, use prefabricated L sections. At wall intersections, use prefabricated T sections. For continuity at returns, offsets, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions, cut and bend reinforcement units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Reinforce masonry openings greater than 12 inches wide with horizontal joint reinforcement

placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8 inches apart, immediately above lintels and below sills. Extend reinforcement minimum 24 inches beyond jambs of opening (except at control joints).

3.8 CONTROL JOINTS A. General: Provide vertical and horizontal control and isolation joints in masonry where

indicated. Build-in related items as masonry work progresses. B. Build-in non-metallic joint filler where indicated. C. Build-in horizontal pressure relieving joints where indicated; construct joints by inserting non-

metallic compressible joint filler of width required to permit installation of sealant and backer rod.

1. Locate horizontal pressure relieving joints beneath masonry veneer supporting shelf

angles attached to structure. 3.9 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Install loose steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless indicated otherwise. 3.10 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING A. Inspection and Adjustment: 1. Upon completion of masonry work, perform a thorough inspection and verify that unit

masonry has been installed in accordance with the provisions of the Drawings and Specifications.

B. Remove and replace loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged masonry units.

Replace units that do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install with fresh mortar or grout; point joints to eliminate evidence of replacement.

C. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with mortar.

Point joints at corners, openings, and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, ready for application of sealants.

D. Cleaning:

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 04200-14

1. General: Clean all exposed masonry surfaces to the satisfaction of DGS’s Representative. 2. After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry as follows: a. Remove large mortar particles by hand using wooden paddles and non-metallic

scrape hoes or chisels. b. Test cleaning methods on sample panels before proceeding with cleaning of

masonry. Leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain DGS’s approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with final cleaning of masonry.

c. Protect adjacent masonry and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.

d. Saturate wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.

3.11 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that unit masonry is without damage

and deterioration at Final Inspection. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 05500-1

SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS A. The specification sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and


1.2 SCOPE A. Provide miscellaneous metal items fabricated from heavy gage ferrous metals where

not provided with structural steel system: Steel Plates in Vault Steel D-Rings in Vault Roof Ladder Miscellaneous framing and supports 1.3 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced below establish minimum requirements for materials,

systems and execution which may be specified in this Section. ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)

AA DAF-45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes

AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI A14.3 Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements


ASTM A 36/A 36M Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A 53/A 53M Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-

Coated, Welded and Seamless ASTM A 123/A 123M Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron

and Steel Products ASTM A167 Standard Specification for Stainless and

Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip

ASTM A 283/A 283 M Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 05500-2

ASTM A 307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength

ASTM A 500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and ShapesASTM A 563 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel NutsA1011/A1011M-04a Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability

ASTM A 475 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Strand

ASTM A 653/A 653M Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A 924/A 924M General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM B 211 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire

ASTM B 221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

ASTM B 633 Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc On Iron And Steel

ASTM E 488 Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements

AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel

U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

CID A-A-344 (Rev B) Lacquer, Clear Gloss, Exterior, Interior

NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)

NAAMM MBG 531 Metal Bar Grating Manual

LEADERSHIP IN ENERGY AND ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN

Version 2.2 Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED)

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 05500-3

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for the

following items. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with specified requirements.

a. Paint products. b. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Shop Drawings showing detailed fabrication and erection data for each

metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show connections, anchorages, and accessory items. Provide templates for anchor bolts and bolts specified for installation by others.

C. Steel Products Procurement Act Certification: 1. Submit certification for steel products used in the Project pursuant with the

provisions of the Steel Products Procurement Act (ACT of 1978, March 3, P.L. 6, No. 3 1-7) (73. P.S. 1881-87) which, in part, requires that if any steel products are to be used or supplied in the performance of a contract, only steel products, as defined by the ACT, that are made in the United States may be used.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual as amended to date. 2. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel as amended to date. 3. AWS D1.3 Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel as amended to date. B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced

in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Accurately field-check actual locations of walls, openings, and other construction to

which metal fabrications must fit before fabrication; show recorded measurements on Shop Drawings submittals. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay in the Work.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site at appropriate intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of the

Work.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 05500-4

B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, scheduled to be embedded in cast-in-place

concrete or masonry, in ample time to avoid delay. C. Keep steel members off ground using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel

members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL SURFACES - GENERAL A. For metal fabrications exposed to view, select materials for surface flatness,

smoothness, and freedom from blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed surfaces that exhibit pitting, rust, scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Prior to cleaning, treating, and application of surface finishes, remove blemishes by grinding or by welding and grinding.

2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. B. Steel D-Rings and D-Ring Clips: ASTM A668, Class D. C. Cold-Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611, Grade A. D. Hot-Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 570, Grade 30. E. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366. F. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 569. G. Stainless Steel: Type 302, 14 gauge. H. Galvanized Steel Sheet: 1. Structural Quality: ASTM A 446, Grade A with G90 coating designation. 2. Commercial Quality: ASTM A 526 with G90 coating designation. I. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type material and finish

as member supported, unless indicated otherwise. J. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS specifications for

metal alloy to be welded. K. Galvanizing: Hot dipped, after fabrication, conforming to ASTM A 123 and ASTM A

385.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 05500-5

2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior

walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A. 2. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561. 3. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92. 4. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111. 5. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92. 6. Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with FS FF-S-

25, Group VIII (anchors, expansion, (nondrilling), Type I (internally threaded tubular expansion anchor); and machine bolts complying with FS FF-B-575, Grade 5.

7. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class, and style as

required. 8. Lock Washers: Helical spring type, carbon steel, FS FF-W-84. 2.4 GROUT A. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining,

noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C 621. 2.5 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer

complying with FS TT-P-645. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint with dry film containing not

less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Electrodes for Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and

electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.

B. Epoxy Adhesive

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 05500-6

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. General: Form metal fabrications to dimensions indicated using proven details of

fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication.

1. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and

straight sharp edges. 2. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. 3. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using

concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

4. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure.

Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.

B. Rough Hardware: Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors,

hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete, masonry, or other structures.

1. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron

washers for heads and nuts at wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.

C. Loose Steel Lintels: For openings and recesses in masonry construction, fabricate loose

structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size shown on Drawings. Hot dip galvanize steel lintels at exposed exterior openings.

1. Size loose lintels for equal bearing of one inch per foot of clear span but not less

than 8 inches bearing each side of openings unless indicated otherwise. D. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: For steel components bearing on masonry or

concrete. Make flat, free from warp or twist, of required thickness and bearing area. Drill to receive anchor bolts as required. Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication.

E. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide miscellaneous steel framing and

supports which are not part of structural steel framework but are required to complete the Work.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 05500-7

1. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports.

2. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connections. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

3. Equip units with 1/8 inch by 1 inch by 8 inch integrally welded anchors spaced 24 inches on centers for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed.

F. Ladders: Fabricate in accordance with dimensions, spacing, details and anchorages

indicted. 1. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3. 2. Side Rails: Continuous steel flat bars, ½ inch x 2 ½ inches, with eased edges,

spaced 18 inches apart. 3. Bar Rungs: ¾ inch square steel bars, spaced 12 inches on centers. 4. Fit rungs at centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth at outer rail

faces. 5. Support ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate locations not exceeding 5

feet on centers using welded or bolted steel brackets. a. Size brackets to support design dead and live loads indicated and to hold

centerline of ladder rungs clear of wall surface by not less than 7 inches. 6. Extend side rails 42 inches above top rung and return rails to wall or structure

unless other secure handholds are provided. If the adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung, goose-neck extended rails back to structure to provide secure ladder access.

7. Provide non-slip surface on top of each rung, either by coating rungs with aluminum oxide granules set in epoxy resin adhesive or by using type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum oxide grout.

G. Steel Plates: Provide ¼” thick steel plate in sections that can be easily place on walls in

existing Arms Vault. Steel plates and steel accessories to be ASTM A 36. 1. Each steel plate section shall be anchored to the existing concrete vault walls

with ¼ inch diameter expansion anchors with a minimum of 2 inches embedment.

2. Provide anchors at a maximum spacing of 2 feet by 2 feet grid and a maximum of 1 foot from each plate edge.

3. Plates shall extend for the full height of the existing walls. 4. Adjacent plates shall abut and shall be fastened together with a lapped,

continuous steel ¼” x 2” plated, welded continuously on each side with 3/16 inch fillet welds.

5. At the floor and ceiling junctures, provide a continuous steel angle 4” x 4” x ¼”. Fasten the angle to the floor and ceiling with previously noted expansion anchors at 2 feet on center.

6. Intermittently stitch weld the angles to the wall plate with 3/16 inch fillet welds, 3 inch long every 12 inches on center.

7. At room corners, provide a continuous steel angle 3” x 3” x ¼” with intermittent stitch welds noted previously.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 05500-8

H. Steel D-Rings: 5” wide x 6” high, outside dimension, x 1” diameter drop forged carbon steel, self-colored ASTM A668, class D, D-Ring on D-Ring clip, with a rated capacity of 17,000 lbs. and a breaking strength of 85,000 lbs.

3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal

fabrications to in-place construction including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation. Set metal fabrication

accurately in location, alignment, and elevation with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, free from rack, and measured from established lines and levels.

C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into

concrete, masonry, or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections

which are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of hot-dip galvanized exterior units which are intended for bolted, screwed, or sleeved connections.

E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc

welding including appearance and quality of welds, methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion, develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals, and obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

2. Remove welding flux immediately. 3. At exposed connections, finish welds and adjacent surfaces smooth and blended

so that no roughness shows after finishing. 3.3 SETTING LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean bond-reducing substances from concrete and masonry and mechanically roughen

bearing surfaces to enhance bonding. Clean bonding surfaces of bearing and leveling plates.

B. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges or other adjustable devices. After

plates have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims. If wedges or shims protrude, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before installing grout.

C. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 1. Use nonmetallic nonshrink grout only.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 05500-9

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately following erection, clean field welds, bolted

connections, and abraded areas of shop primer and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting in compliance with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touch-up of field painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. At galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing repair paint in compliance with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 06100-1

SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS A. The specification sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and


1.2 SUMMARY A. Scope of Work:

1. Provide rough carpentry work: a. Wood framing. b. Sheathing. c. Nailers, blocking, and furring. d. Equipment backing panels. e. Roof curbs and cants. f. Blocking in wall and roof openings g. Wood furring h. Preservative treatment of wood. i. Fire Retardant treatment of wood where required

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Window stools are specified in Section 06650 – SOLID POLYMER

FABRICATIONS 1.3 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced below establish minimum requirements for

materials, systems and execution which may be specified in this Section.

AMERICAN FOREST & PAPER ASSOCIATION (AF&PA)

AF&PA T01 National Design Specification for Wood Construction

AF&PA T11 Manual for Wood Frame Construction

AMERICAN HARDBOARD ASSOCIATION (AHA)

AHA A194.1 Cellulosic Fiber Board

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 06100-2


ASTM A 307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength

ASTM C 79/C 79M Treated Core and Nontreated Core Gypsum Sheathing Board

ASTM C 518 Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties By Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus

ASTM C 1177/C 1177M Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing

ASTM D 2898 Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing

ASTM F 547 Definitions of Terms Relating to Nails for Use with Wood and Wood-Base Materials

AMERICAN WOOD-PRESERVERS' ASSOCIATION (AWPA)

AWPA C2 Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes

AWPA C9 Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes

AWPA C20 Structural Lumber Fire-Retardant Pressure Treatment

AWPA C27 Plywood - Fire-Retardant Pressure Treatment

AWPA M4 Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products

AWPA P5 Standards for Waterborne Preservatives

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE (DOC)

DOC PS 1 Voluntary Product Standard - Construction and Industrial Plywood

DOC PS 2 Performance Standards for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels

FACTORY MUTUAL ENGINEERING AND RESEARCH (FM)

FM LPD 1-49 Loss Prevention Data Sheet - Perimeter Flashing

FOREST STEWARDSHIP COUNCIL

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 06100-3

Certification for Wood Based Products

NATIONAL HARDWOOD LUMBER ASSOCIATION (NHLA)

NHLA Rules Rules for the Measurement & Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress

NORTHEASTERN LUMBER MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NELMA)

NELMA Grading Rules Standard Grading Rules for Northeastern

Lumber

SOUTHERN PINE INSPECTION BUREAU (SPIB)

SPIB Rules Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with applicable provisions of Section 01340. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s Product Data for fasteners, connectors, and other

hardware items. C. Material Certificates: 1. Certification of Preservative Treatment: Furnish certification by treating

plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and conformance with applicable standards.

2. Certification of Fire-Retardant Treatment: Furnish certification by

treating plant that treated material complies with specified standards. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. General: Comply with applicable provisions of the following: a. Product Use Manual of the Western Wood Products Association. b. Southern Pine Use Guide and Construction Guides of the Southern Pine

Council. c. Selection and use guides of the Northeastern Lumber Manufacturer’s Association.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 06100-4

d. Plywood Specification and Grade Guide of the American Plywood Association.

B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced


1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact

with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panel products; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.

B. Sticker between each course of pressure treated lumber and plywood to ensure air

circulation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for

accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to permit attachment of other work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Building Wrap: DuPont Tyvek CertainTeed Dow Building Solutions or equal as approved by the Professional 2.2 LUMBER - GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20 American Softwood

Lumber Standard and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.

B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and abbreviations used to reference lumber

grades and species include the following: WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 06100-5

SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. APA - American Plywood Association. C. Grade Stamps: Factory-mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection

agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.

D. Nominal sizes are indicated except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes

required by PS 20 for moisture content specified for each use. 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Provide seasoned dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time

of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including rooftop

equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, rounds, strapping, and similar uses. Provide lumber of sizes indicated or required, worked into shapes shown, and as follows:

1. Grade: Standard Grade light framing size lumber of any species or size as

required. a. No. 3 Common or Standard grade per WCLIB or WWPA. b. No. 3 per SPIB. 2. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to

receive wood preservative treatment. 2.4 CONCEALED CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 U. S. Product Standard for

Construction and Industrial Plywood for plywood panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with American Plywood Association (APA) Performance Standard and Policies for Structural-Use Panels, Form No. E445.

1. Trademark: Factory-mark each construction panel with APA trademark

evidencing compliance with grade requirements. a. Plywood Roof Sheathing: 1) Grade Designation: BD. 2) Exposure Classification: Exterior. 3) Face Veneer Species: Fir.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 06100-6

4) Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. b. Plywood Wall Sheathing: 1) Grade Designation: CD. 2) Exposure Classification: Exterior. 3) Face Veneer Species: Fir. 4) Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2.5 CONSTRUCTION PANELS FOR BACKING A. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment provide fire-

retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation APA C-D PLUGGED INT with exterior glue.

1. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 2.6 WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated to be pressure treated

(PT) or is herein specified to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item with AWPB Quality Mark requirements.

1. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives to comply with

AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following:

a. Cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, strapping, and

similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

b. Sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, strapping, and similar concealed members in contact with concrete or masonry.

B. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Where fire-retardant treated wood (FRTW) is indicated,

pressure impregnate lumber and plywood with fire-retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA C20 and C27, respectively, for treatment type indicated below. Identify FRTW lumber and plywood with appropriate classification marking of UL, UST, TPI, or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Application a. Lumber and panel products which are attached to or concealed within

fire-rated partitions. b. Construction panels for backing.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 06100-7

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the

following: 1. Blocking 2. Nailers B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber

with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species: 1. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA 2. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 2.8 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements

specified herein for material and manufacture. 1. For exterior work, where rough carpentry is in ground contact, or in area of high

relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153 or of AISI Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1. C. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. D. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A, with ASTM A 563 hex nuts

and, where required, flat washers. E. Nails: Common, unless indicated otherwise. F. Strap Anchors: 12 gage by 1 ¼ inch wide, punched 9 inches on centers for nailing. G. Construction Mastic: Phenol resorcinol-type complying with APA Specification AFG-

01. H. Beam and Joist Hangers 1. Parallam and microllam beam hangers per beam manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Standard lumber joist hangers: appropriate size to facilitate joists and as per joist hanger manufacturer’s recommendations.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 06100-8

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Building Paper: Asphalt-saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D226, Type 1

(No. 15 asphalt felt), unperforated. B. Building Wrap: Air-retarder sheeting made from polyolefins; cross-laminated films,

woven strands, or spun-bonded fibers; coated or uncoated; with or without perforations; and complying with ASTM E 1677, Type I.

1. Thickness: Not less than 3 mils. 2. Permeance: Not less than 10 perms. 3. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 4. Allowable Exposure Time: Not less than three months. C. Building Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building wrap

manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. D. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as

a sill sealer; 1-inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer’s standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that may impair quality of work, and units too

small for use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Install wood framing in compliance with applicable provisions of N.F.P.A. Manual of

House Framing unless indicated otherwise. C. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members set plumb and true

and cut to fit. D. Securely fasten carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as

required by recognized standards. E. Provide cold-formed metal hangers, clips, and similar anchors indicated. F. Use common wire nails for general framing. Select fasteners of size that will not

penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or is scheduled to receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required.

3.2 WOOD FRAMING A. Provide framing members of sizes and at spacings shown; frame openings as indicated.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 06100-9

B. Anchor and nail members to comply with N.F.P.A. Recommended Nailing Schedule of Manual for House Framing and National Design Specifications for Wood Construction.

3.3 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, AND BLOCKING A. Provide where shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work.

Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work.

B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts

flush with surfaces unless indicated otherwise. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.

3.4 WOOD FURRING A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as

required for tolerance of finished work. 3.5 ROOF SHEATHING A. Lay face grain at right angles to supports except where indicated otherwise. B. Stagger joints. C. Install metal H clips at panel edges. D. Place fasteners at least 3/8 inch in from edge and 6 inches on center along supported

edges. Fasten 12 inches on centers along intermediate supports. E. Protect sheathing from moisture damage until roofing is installed. 3.6 WALL SHEATHING A. Panel edges shall bear on framing members and butt along their centerlines. Back-

block panel edges which do not bear on framing members with 2 inch nominal framing. B. Place nails not less than 3/8 inch in from edge and 6 inches on centers along

intermediate supports and along panel edge. C. Stagger panel end joints. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 06650-1

SECTION 06650 - SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS A. The specification sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and


1.2 SUMMARY A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary to fabricate and install

solid polymer window stools as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Windows are Section 08520 – ALUMINUM WINDOWS. 2. Solid Plastic Pedestal Benches are specified in Section 10170 – PLASTIC TOILET

COMPARTMENTS. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced below establish minimum requirements for materials, systems and

execution which may be specified in this Section. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI A136.1 Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile ANSI Z124.3 Plastic Lavatories ANSI Z124.6 Plastic Sinks

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Shop Drawings showing detailed fabrication and erection data for solid polymer

fabrications. a. Show location of each item; include dimensioned plans and elevations, large-

scale details, attachment devices, and other related components.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 06650-2

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each type of product specified. C. Samples: Submit solid surfacing material samples representing manufacturer’s standard range

of colors. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the

necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where window stools are indicated to be fit to other construction, check

actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before commencing fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the Work.

B. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, plumbing rough-ins and similar elements

required for support or attachment of solid polymer fabrications. 1.7 DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect solid polymer fabrications during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent

damage, soilage, and deterioration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Solid Surfacing Material 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide material for solid

polymer fabrications by one of the following: Corian by Dupont – “Deep Nocturne” Meganite Acrylic Solid Surface – “Galaxy Mist” 311 Formica Solid Surfacing – “Black Lava” 501 or equal as approved by the Professional B. Fabrication and Installation Adhesives and Seaming Compound: As recommended by

manufacturer of solid surfacing material for application intended. PART 3 – EXECUTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 06650-3

3.1 FABRICATION A. General: Shop-fabricate solid polymer window stools to dimensions, profiles, and details to

match existing slate stools. Construct units in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

1. Fabricate window stools in one-piece lengths. a. Form joints using approved seaming compound. b. After seaming compound has cured, remove adhesive resin and buff assembly to

remove evidence of tool marks and other surface imperfections. c. Exposed-to-view joints to be invisible after fabrication and finishing operations are

complete. 2. Finish exposed-to-view surfaces to a satin sheen using 600 grit emery, or silicone carbide

sandpaper. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and finishing before shipment to Project Site to

maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Securely anchor solid polymer window stools to support systems as indicated on the

Drawings. B. Install window stools plumb, level, true, and straight without warp or distortion. Shim as

required using concealed devices. Maintain a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8'-0" for plumb and level. C. Scribe window stools to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at

cuts. D. Immediately following installation, remove excess installation adhesive from exposed solid

polymer surfaces and adjacent materials. 3.3 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged and defective solid polymer fabrication assemblies where possible to eliminate

visual defects. Where repair is not possible, replace defective units. B. Provide protection and maintain conditions to ensure that solid polymer fabrications will be

without damage or deterioration at Final Inspection. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962.29 Phase 1.1 07195-1

SECTION 07195 - AIR BARRIERS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS A. The specification sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and


1.2 SUMMARY A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary to provide air barriers as

shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced below establish minimum requirements for materials, systems and

execution which may be specified in this Section.


ASTM C 1136 Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 1177/C 1177M Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing ASTM E 96 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials ASTM E 154 Water Vapor Retarders used in Contact with Earth under

Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as a Ground Cover 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with applicable provisions of Section 01340. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each type of air

barrier and accessory specified.

D.G.S. 962.29 Phase 1.1 07195-2

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the


1.6 DELIVERY, STOARGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site in undamaged and original packaging, indicating the name of the

manufacturer and product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR BARRIERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide by one of the following: DuPont Company - Tyvek Housewrap CertainTeed Dow Building Solutions or equal as approved by the Professional 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Joint Tape: As recommended by Air Barrier manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install air barrier over gypsum board or plywood sheathing in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. B. Commence air barrier installation at top of sheathing. Fold 6 inches of barrier under itself and

secure top continuously with tape. Drape barrier over entire vertical surface of sheathing and secure at bottom with continuous ribbon of tape.

C. At spacings recommended by manufacturer, fasten air barrier to sheathing using 16 gage

galvanized 3/8 inch crown staples. D. Lap air barrier joints minimum 3 inches. E. Tape vertical and horizontal joints and edges at corners, ends, and openings.

D.G.S. 962.29 Phase 1.1 07195-3

3.2 PROTECTION AND REPAIR A. Upon completion of air barrier installation, institute protective measures required to ensure that

air barrier envelope will be without damage or deterioration at Final Inspection or Acceptance. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07210-1

SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS


1.2 SUMMARY A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary to provide building insulation as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Provide building insulation of types as applicable: 1. Board insulation at exterior walls. 2. Blanket/batt insulation around exterior windows and at stud infill locations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s product literature and installation instructions for each type of

insulation specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source

with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.

B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials identical to those whose

indicated fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test method indicated below, by UL, or by other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07210-2

3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. C. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the

necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work

D. Upon completion of insulation work, post a completed certificate of insulation compliance in

accordance with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 1. B. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and deterioration from moisture, soiling,

and other causes. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage, and protection during installation.

C. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to extent necessary for period of installation and

concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project

site ahead of installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each

area of construction. 1.6 DEFINITIONS A. Thermal Resistivity: Where the thermal resistivity of insulation products is designated by R

values, they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity (K values). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insulation products by one of the following:

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07210-3

1. Polyisocyanurate Board The Dow Chemical Company Amoco Foam Products Co. DiversiFoam Products or equal as approved by the Professional 2. Glass Fiber Insulation Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. Certainteed Corp. Manville Building Insulations Div. or equal as approved by the Professional 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. Polyisocyanurate Board: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with glass-fiber-reinforced

polyisocyanurate closed-cell foam core and aluminum foil facing laminated to one side; complying with FS HH-I-1972/1, Class 2; aged R values of 8 and 7.2 at 40 and 75 degrees F respectively; and as follows:

1. Thickness: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Size: As required to suit Project conditions. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed

values of 20 and 200, respectively. 4. Application: Rigid wall insulation. B. Faced Mineral Fiber Blankets/Batts: Thermal insulation produced by combining mineral

fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type III, Class A (blankets with reflective vapor-retarder membrane facing with flame spread of 25 or less); foil-skrim-kraft or foil-skrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on one face.

1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 50, respectively. 3. Application: As indicated on the Drawings. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation to

substrates indicated.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07210-4

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations. Remove fins and projections that may

hamper proper installation of insulation board. 3.2 INSTALLATION – GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions regarding product and application

indicated. B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit

tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness unless indicated otherwise or required

to accomplish total thickness. D. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated. If no specific method is indicated,

bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

E. Seal joints between closed-cell insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to

edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are pressed in place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BLANKET/BATT INSULATION A. Set vapor retarder faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction. Do not

obstruct ventilation spaces except for firestopping.

1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.

B. Stuff glass fiber loose fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where

shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse,

and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation will be subjected to abuse and cannot be immediately concealed by permanent construction.

END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07410-1

SECTION 07410 – MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS


1.2 SUMMARY A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary to complete factory-formed

standing seam metal roofing as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Treated wood blocking is specified in SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY. 2. Exposed metal flashing and related elements are specified in SECTION 07620 - SHEET

METAL FLASHING AND TRIM. 3. Single ply membrane roofing systems are specified in SECTION 07531 –

THERMOPLASTIC SHEET ROOFING. 4. Metal copings and metal soffit systems are specified in SECTION 07710 -

MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with applicable provision of Division 1. B. Shop Drawings 1. Show manner of forming, joining, and securing metal roofing. Indicate pattern of seams.

Show expansion joint details, waterproof connections to adjoining work and at obstructions and penetrations, and details at changes of direction and system terminations.

C. Samples for Initial Selection 1. Manufacturer's color chips showing full range of standard colors, textures, and patterns

available as factory-applied finishes.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07410-2

D. Samples for Verification 1. 12 inches long by actual panel width; include both flat pan and seam construction,

finished as specified. Include clips, battens, fasteners, closures, and other pertinent accessories.

E. Product Data 1. Submit manufacturer's product literature including technical data and installation

instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Resistance Rating: Provide roof systems that have been tested and listed by design

number in UL Fire Resistance Directory for 2-hour assembly rating. B. Wind Uplift: Provide roof systems meeting or exceeding requirements of UL for Class 90

wind uplift resistance. C. Single Source Responsibility 1. Obtain manufactured roof panels and accessories from a single manufacturer. D. Manufacturer’s Qualification 1. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years experience in the production of

the type of roofing herein specified, and shall be able to show experience with projects of similar size and complexity.

E. Installer Qualifications 1. The installer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience installing the type of

roofing herein specified, on projects of similar size and complexity. F. Reference Standards 1. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of SMACNA Architectural

Sheet Metal Manual. 1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish certified test results by a recognized testing laboratory or agency in accordance with

the following methods: 1. Air Infiltration: No leakage when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at pressure

differentials up to 1.57 psf.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07410-3

2. Water Penetration: No penetration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at an inward static air pressure differential of not less than 6.24 psf and not more than 12.0 psf.

1.6 WARRANTY A. Contractor’s Warranty: 1. Contractor’s Responsibility: The General Contractor shall take, or cause to have taken,

any and all corrective measures necessary to keep the roofing system free of all defects, to the satisfaction of the Department, and to maintain the roofing system in a watertight condition. The Contractor shall have the responsibility for said corrective measures for two (2) years after the date of Final Inspection. The Contractor shall be responsible for the removal and replacement of the roofing system, if in the judgement of the Department, removal and replacement is necessary to keep the roofing system free of all defects or to maintain the roofing system in a watertight condition. The Contractor shall also repair, or remove and replace, if the Department deems it to be necessary, any part of the building, including the interior, damaged as a result of leaks in the roofing system. The interior of the building includes, but is not limited to, the furnishings and fixtures. There shall be no limit to the Contractor’s liability for fulfilling the aforementioned responsibilities.

a. Final Inspection shall include a statement, supplied by the Contractor and signed by

an authorized representative of the roofing manufacturer, attesting to the fact that the roofing installation and finished condition is acceptable for warranty by the manufacturer.

2. Exclusions: The Contractor shall not be responsible for repairs to, or replacement of, the

roofing system, if repairs or replacement is necessary due to a natural disaster, such as lighting, flood, tornado or earthquake.

3. Notification: The Department will notify the Contractor, as soon as reasonably possible,

after it has knowledge of defects in the roofing system. Should the Contractor fail to promptly take corrective measures, the Department may undertake corrective measures. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all expenses incurred by the Department in undertaking the necessary corrective measures. In addition, the Department’s undertaking of corrective measures shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of the aforementioned responsibilities.

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: 1. The General Contractor shall provide the Department with a twenty (20) year warranty,

furnished by the manufacturer, which shall warrant that the said manufacturer will repair any leaks in the roofing system, not to exceed the original cost of the installed roof over the life of the warranty, installed by an applicator authorized by said manufacturer.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07410-4

2. Leaks from the following causes shall be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty: a. Defects in the roofing system material. b. Workmanship of the authorized applicator. 3. The following exclusions are permitted in the manufacturer’s warranty: a. Natural disasters such as lighting, hail, floods, tornadoes, or earthquakes. b. Damage from traffic or storage of materials on the roof. c. Structural failure of roof deck, parapet or coping. d. Infiltration of moisture in, through or around walls, coping or building structure. e. Movement or deterioration of metal counterflashing or other metal components

adjacent to the roof. f. Damage to the building (other than roofing and insulation) or its components

adjacent to the roof. 4. The warranty shall provide that in the event a leak should occur within the warranty

period, and if such leak is within the coverage of the warranty, the warrantor will, at no expense to the Department, make or have made, all necessary repairs to put the roof membrane, base flashing and roof insulation in a dry and watertight condition, using the same materials and specifications as the original application. There will be no limit to the warrantor’s liability for making such repairs over the period of the warranty.

5. The warranty shall provide that if, upon proper notification, the warrantor fails to

promptly repair the roof, the Department may make temporary repairs to avoid damage to the facility. Such action shall not be considered a breach of the provisions of the warranty.

6. The Department shall be permitted to make alterations, additions and repairs to the roof,

within the written approved guidelines of the warrantor, without jeopardizing the unexpired portion of the warranty’s original term.

7. Metal roofs and exposed fasteners shall be warranted against rust. Also, on metal roofs,

the manufacturer, upon completion, inspection and written acceptance of the roof installation, shall furnish a warranty covering paint finish against cracking, checking, blistering, peeling, flaking and chipping for a period of twenty (20) years.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 1. B. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with

identification labels intact. Identify fabricated components with UL 90 label where appropriate.

C. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Bundle panels in waterproof wrapping paper.

Package trim and accessories in waterproof wrapping paper.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07410-5

D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful conditions. Store material in dry, above-ground location. Stack prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, abrasion, scratching and denting. Elevate one end of each skid to allow for moisture run off. Store products of this section in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until installation of products. Maintain dry, heated storage area for products of this section until installation of products.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide manufactured roof panels and related

accessory components by one of the following: Atas International, Inc. AEP-Span Berridge Mfg. Col. Petersen Aluminum Corp. or equal as approved by the Professional 2.2 PRIMARY MATERIALS A. Steel Roofing Sheet: Smooth-surfaced, 24 gauge Galvalume prefinished steel sheet

conforming to ASTM 792-86. 1. Profile: 13 ½” Flat panel, 1” standing seams. 2. Finish (Exposed Surfaces): Thermo-cured coating system consisting of epoxy or

urethane primer with fluorocarbon topcoat formulated with Kynar 500 resins. Provide topcoat with strippable protective film.

a. Minimum Combined Dry Film Thickness: 1.0 mil. b. Color: Patina Green or Dove Gray as selected by the Professional 3. Finish (Concealed Surfaces): Manufacturer's standard primer. 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. General: Provide components required for a complete roof system including trim,

copings, fasciae, sills, corner units, ridge closures, clips, cleats, seam covers, battens, fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and other accessory items required for a weathertight installation. Fabricate exposed-to-view accessory items from prefinished Galvalume steel sheet of gage appropriate for purpose intended and factory-finish with a high-performance thermo-cured coating system identical to that specified for primary roofing panels.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07410-6

B. Sealant: Non-setting, non-hardening, non-migrating, heavy-bodied polyisobutylene

mastic sealant. C. Underlayment: 30 pound asphalt-saturated roofing felt. D. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard concealed fasteners. Exposed fasteners not

permitted. E. Snowguards: Prefabricated, noncorrosive units, designed to use with roof panels, color

to match roof panels and complete with predrilled holes for anchoring. Snowguard layout to be provided by a licensed engineer.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate manufactured roof panels in compliance with reference standards,

approved Shop Drawings, and material manufacturer's recommendations for forming. Form sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral flashings, and other components to profiles, patterns, and drainage arrangements indicated and required for permanently leakproof construction. Form exposed faces flat and free from excessive oil-canning, buckling, and avoidable tool marks considering temper and reflectivity of metal, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Design and fabricate assemblies for waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction. Seal joints as indicated and required to ensure watertight installation.

B. Roofing System: 13 ½” inch wide flat panels, 1 inch high standing lock seams with

extruded vinyl weatherstrip and mechanically-seamed sidelaps. 1. Panel Length: Single piece without joints. 2. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion type joints are indicated or

required for proper performance of roofing system, form metal to provide for installation of elastomeric sealant.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of manufactured roof panels with adjoining construction to

ensure a secure, permanently leakproof, and noncorrosive roofing system. 3.3 INSTALLATION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07410-7

A. General: Comply with Reference Standards, approved Shop Drawings, and

recommendations of metal roofing manufacturer. B. Separations: Provide for separation of metal components from noncompatible metals or

corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with bituminous coating or other permanent separation.

C. Install Z girts over metal deck at vertical spacing of 24 inches on centers. 1. Secure bottom leg of girts through high ribs of metal deck using pan head, low

profile, noncorrosive fasteners. D. Install roof panels with lines and corners of exposed components set true and accurate

with uniform, neatly formed seams and minimal exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 1. Secure roof panel system to top leg of Z girts using noncorrosive fasteners. E. Conceal fasteners and expansion elements where possible in exposed work and locate to

minimize possibility of leakage. F. Install sealant at all locations required to make installation watertight. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove protective film (if any) from exposed metal surfaces promptly following

installation. Strip film with care to avoid damage to finishes. B. Institute appropriate measures to ensure that manufactured metal roofing is without

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07531-1

SECTION 07531 – THERMOPLASTIC SHEET ROOFING (TPO) PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS


1.2 SUMMARY A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary to provide building insulation as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 2. Provide roofing systems specified herein utilizing single ply fully adhered membranes. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere 1. Treated wood blocking is specified in SECTION 06100 – ROUGH CARPENTRY. 2. Exposed metal flashing and related elements are specified in SECTION 07620 – SHEET

METAL FLASHING AND TRIM. 3. Exposed metal roofing systems and related components are specified in SECTION 07710

– MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS. 4. Metal copings and metal soffit systems are specified in SECTION 07710 –

MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALITIES. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The Publications referenced below establish minimum requirements for materials,

systems and execution which may be specified in this section. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) ANSI/SPRI WD-1 Wind Design Standard for Roofing Assemblies ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM C 208 Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating

Board

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07531-2

ASTM C 578 Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation

ASTM C 1289 Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board

ASTM D 41 Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing

ASTM D 226 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing

ASTM D 312 Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing ASTM D 412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and

Thermoplastic Elastomers – Tension ASTM D 1079 Standard Terminology Relating to Roofing,

Waterproofing and Bituminous Materials ASTM D 2178 Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in

Roofing and Waterproofing ASTM D 4263 Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in

Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method ASTM D 4491 Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of

Geotextiles by Permittivity ASTM D 4869 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic

Felt Underlayment Used in Steep Slope Roofing ASTM D 6878 Standard Specifications for Thermoplastic Polyolefin

Based Sheet Roofing ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission

of Materials FACTORY MUTUAL (FM GLOBAL) FACTORY MUTUAL STANDARD 4470 Approval Standard for Class 1

Roof Covers LOSS PREVENTION DATA SHEETS 1-28, 1-29 NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NRCA) Low Slope Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, Current Edition

SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, INC. (SMACNA) – Architectural Sheet Metal Manual

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data 1. Submit specifications, installation instructions, and general recommendations from

manufacturer of flexible sheet roofing system materials. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07531-3

C. Samples: Submit the following: 1. Membrane and accessory items. 2. Vapor retarder and slip sheet. 3. Insulation. D. Shop Drawings 1. Show roof configuration, sheet layout, seam locations, perimeter details, and special

conditions. 2. Indicate layout of tapered insulation materials. E. Certificates 1. Submit certificate by roofing materials manufacturer attesting to product compliance

with physical properties of this Specification. 2. Submit certificates of acceptance by roofing materials manufacturer attesting to product

installation being in compliance with manufacturer’s installation instructions, approved details, and shop drawings as prepared for this Project.

F. Pre-Roofing Conference Records. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility 1. Obtain primary sheet membrane roofing materials from a single manufacturer. Provide

secondary materials as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. B. Manufacturer’s Qualification 1. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years experience in the production of

the type of roofing herein specified, and shall be able to show experience with projects of similar size and complexity.

C. Installer Qualifications 1. The installer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience installing the type of

roofing herein specified, on projects of similar size and complexity. D. UL Listing: Provide labeled materials that have been tested and listed by UL in Building

Materials Directory or by other nationally recognized testing laboratory for application indicated with Class A rated materials/systems for roof applications shown. It is a requirement that a UL Class A rated and FM Class I-90 wind uplift rated roofing system be provided for each roof in the Project.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07531-4

1. The roofing system as designed includes the Carlisle products specified herein. If manufacturers’ roofing systems other than the system as designed are accepted, provide at no increase in Contract Price such additional products and differing methods of execution (if any) required by such manufacturer.

E. Pre-Roofing Conference: Prior to installation of roof insulation, single ply membrane, and

related components, meet at Project site, or other mutually agreed location, with installer, roofing membrane manufacturer, installers of related work, and other entities concerned with roofing performance including (where applicable) test agencies, governing authorities, Using Agency representative, Department representative and Professional. Record discussions and agreements and furnish copy to each participant. Provide at least 72 hours' advanced notice to participants prior to convening pre-roofing conference.

F. Roofing insulation shall have a minimum value of R-20. The building envelope must comply

with ASHRAE 90.1 2007 or local code (whichever is more stringent). 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 1. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in their original unopened containers, clearly labeled with

manufacturer’s name, brand name, and such identifying numbers as are appropriate. C. Storage: Store materials, except membrane, between 60 degrees F, and 80 degrees F. 1. Restore materials to proper working temperature if exposed to lower temperature than

above. 2. Store materials, except membrane, in dry area and protect from the elements. Replace

damaged materials at Contractor’s expense. D. Handling: Handle rolled materials in a manner to prevent damage to edge or ends. Do not use

materials damaged in storage or handling. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather: Proceed with roofing work when current and forecasted weather conditions permit

work to be performed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements.

B. Proceed with work so new roofing materials are not subject to construction traffic. When

necessary, new roof sections shall be protected and inspected upon completion for possible damage.

C. Provide protection, such as ¾ inch thick plywood, for all roof areas exposed to traffic during

construction. Plywood must be smooth and free of fasteners and splinters. D. Substrate Conditions: Do not begin roofing installation until substrates have been inspected

and are determined to be in satisfactory condition.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07531-5

E. Observe roof materials manufacturer’s temporary sealing requirements of new roof material

edge for weather and moisture protection and sealing of unfinished work when stopping for the day.

1.9 CONTRACTOR’S WARRANTY A. Contractor’s Responsibility: The Contractor shall take, or cause to have taken, any and

all corrective measures necessary to keep the roofing system free of all defects, to the satisfaction of the Department, and to maintain the roofing system in a watertight condition. The Contractor shall have the responsibility for said corrective measures for two (2) years after the date of Final Inspection. Then the Contractor shall be responsible for the removal and replacement of the roofing system, if in the judgment of the Department, removal and replacement is necessary to keep the roofing system free of all defects or to maintain the roofing system in a watertight condition. The Contractor shall also repair, or remove and replace, if the Department deems it to be necessary, or any part of the building, including the interior, damaged as a result of leaks in the roofing system. The interior of the building includes, but is not limited to, the furnishings and fixtures. There shall be no limit to the Contractor’s liability for fulfilling the aforementioned responsibilities.

1. Final Inspection shall include a statement, supplied by the Contractor and signed

by an authorized representative of the roofing manufacturer, attesting to the fact that the roofing installation and finished condition is acceptable for warranty by that manufacturer.

B. Exclusions: The Contractor shall not be responsible for repairs to, or replacement of, the

roofing system, if repairs or replacement is necessary due to a natural disaster, such as lightning, flood, tornado or earthquake.

C. Notification: The Department will notify the Contractor, as soon as reasonably possibly,

after it has knowledge of defects in the roofing system Should the Contractor fail to promptly take corrective measures, the Department may undertake corrective measures. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all expenses incurred by the Department in undertaking the necessary corrective measures. In addition, the Department’s undertaking of corrective measures shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of the aforementioned responsibilities.

1.10 MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall provide the Department with a twenty (20) year warranty, furnished by the manufacturer, which shall warrant that the said manufacturer will repair any leaks in the roofing system, not to exceed the original cost of the installed roof over the life of the warranty, installed by an applicator authorized by said manufacturer.

B. Leaks from the following causes shall be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty: 1. Defects in the roofing system material. 2. Workmanship of the authorized applicator.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07531-6

C. The following exclusions are permitted in the manufacturer’s warranty:

1. Natural disasters such as lightning, hail, floods, tornadoes or earthquakes. 2. Damage from traffic or storage of materials on roof. 3. Structural failure of roof deck, parapet or coping. 4. Infiltration of moisture in, through or around walls, coping or building structure. 5. Movement of deterioration of metal counter-flashing or other metal components

adjacent to the roof. 6. Damage to the building (other than roofing and insulation) or its components

adjacent to the roof. D. The warranty shall provide that in the event a leak should occur within the warranty

period, and if such leak is within the coverage of the warranty, the warrantor will, at no expense to the Department, make or have made, all necessary repairs to put the roof membrane, base flashing and roof insulation in a dry and watertight condition, using the same materials and specifications as the original application. There will be no limit to the warrantor’s liability for making such repairs over the period of the warranty.

E. The warranty shall provide that if, upon proper notification, the warrantor fails to

promptly repair the roof, the Department may make temporary repairs to avoid damage to the facility. Such action shall not be considered a breach of the provisions of the warranty.

F. The Department shall be permitted to make alterations, additions and repairs to the roof,

within the written approved guidelines of the warrantor, without jeopardizing the unexpired portion of the warranty’s original term.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. The following stated manufacturer and roofing system designations form the basis of the

Architect’s design. 1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated, Sure-Weld System (Fully Adhered) B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Carlisle SynTec; Sure-Weld System Firestone; UltraPly 78+ Johns Manville Corp.; 60 mil TPO or equal as approved by the Professional

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07531-7

2.2 ROOFING MEMBRANE A. Membrane to be 0.060 mil thick, white, reinforced TPO (Thermoplastic Polyolefin)

membrane, as needed to complete roofing system. Membrane thickness over the reinforcing scrim (top-ply thickness) shall be nominal 0.015 mil or thicker. Membrane sheets in rolls 12’, 10’ or 8’ wide by 100’ long.

B. Roofing System Sheet Physical Properties 1. Before submission for consideration, additional manufacturer’s products must

meet or exceed the minimum physical property requirements specified herein. 2. Minimum physical properties of TPO (Thermoplastic Polyoletin) compounded

elastomer roofing system sheet are as follows: Property Test Method Property of Unaged Sheet Sheet Thickness - 0.060 inch reinforced (adhered system) Sheet Thickness - 0.060 inch reinforced (mechanically attached system) Color - White Tolerance on Nominal Thickness ASTM D 751 ± 10% Thickness Over Scrim, min, in. ASTM D7635 0.024 min. in. Breaking Strength, min, lbf ASTM D751 250 min. - 360 typ. lbf Elongation at Break of Fabric ASTM D751 15% min - 25% typ. Tearing Strength, min. lbf ASTM D751 55 – 130 lbf Brittleness Point, max, ºF (ºC) ASTM D2137 -40 / -50 Degrees Ozone Resistance ASTM D1149 No Cracks Resistance to Water Absorption ASTM D471 ± 3.0 max. Field seam strength, lbf/in. ASTM D1876 25 – 60 lbf Water vapor permeance ASTM E 96 0.10 max. - 0.05 typ. perms Puncture resistance, lbf FTM 101C 300 – 350 lbf

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07531-8

2.3 INSULATION A. When applicable, insulation shall be installed in multiple layers. The first and second layer of

insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the substrate in accordance with the manufacturer’s published specifications. Provide flat or sloped insulation, as required to achieve prescribed slopes.

B. Insulation shall be a polyisocyanurate insulation board, as provided by membrane

manufacturer, with a minimum R-value of 20. 1. Polyisocyanurate Insulation Board – A foam core insulation board covered on both sides

with a medium weight fiber reinforced felt facer, meeting ASTM C 1289-06, Type II, Class 1, grade 2 (20 psi) or Grade 3 (25 psi).

2.4 ROOFING SYSTEM ACCESSORIES A. Molded flashing: Use factory fabricated tapered pipe flashings manufactured form TPO,

having physical properties compatible with the roofing system sheet material. B. Rubber Nailing Strip: Specially designed strips for roof perimeter TPO sheet fastening using

sheet manufacturers coated screws. C. Insulation Fasteners: Specially coated fasteners and plates for securing roof insulation in place

when installed under roofing system sheets. E. Warranty: Provide a warranty for the above accessories required in roofing system installation

for consistency with roofing system manufacturer’s warranty. 2.5 BONDING, SPLICING AND SEALING MATERIALS A. General: Bonding adhesives, splicing cement and sealing materials must be products

manufactured or formulated specifically for use with the TPO roofing system sheets and membrane flashings.

B. Bonding Adhesive: Use materials by membrane manufacturer as designed for compatibility

and bonding with substrate. C. Splicing Cement: Use materials by membrane manufacturer as designed for sheet to sheet

splicing only. D. In-Seam and Lap Edge Sealant: Use materials by membrane manufacturer as designed for in-

seam and lap or splice edge sealing and sheet to flashing edge sealing. E. Water Cut-Off Mastic and Temporary Work Stop Sealants: Use materials by membrane

manufacturer as designed for new work continuance and such other temporary work conditions encountered.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07531-9

F. Pourable Sealer: Use pourable consistency materials by membrane manufacturer as designed for applications such as pocket filling and transition sealing.

2.6 WELDING A. Hot air weld the membrane sheet a minimum of 1 ½ inches with an Automatic Hot Air

Welding Machine. B. Membranes that have been exposed to the elements for approximately 7 days, must be

repaired with Membrane cleaner in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. C. Perform all installation of membrane in accordance to the manufacturer’s written

instructions. 2.7 WALKWAY COURSE A. Protective surfacing for roof traffic shall be TPO Walkway Rolls, installed per manufacturer’s

requirements. B. Size: ¾ inch thick by 36 inches wide, of lengths suited to planned walk areas and areas of

potential damage and to provide the least number of slabs. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that work of other trades, which penetrates roof deck or requires men and

equipment to traverse roof deck, has been completed. B. Examine surfaces for inadequate anchorage, foreign material, moisture and unevenness

which would affect the execution and quality of elastic sheet roofing system and membrane flashing work.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Clear insulated roof surface of accumulated foreign materials and debris. B. Perform surface deficiency corrective work in accordance with roofing system

manufacturer’s recommended practice and consistent with warranty requirements. 3.3 INSULATION PLACEMENT AND ATTACHMENT A. Install insulation or membrane underlayment over the substrate with boards butted

tightly together with no joints or gaps greater than ¼ inch. Stagger joints both horizontally and vertically if multiple layers are provided.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07531-10

B. Secure insulation to the substrate with the required fasteners and plates in accordance

with manufacturer’s specifications. 3.4 MEMBRANE PLACEMENT AND ATTACHMENT A. Unroll and position membrane. Provide and secure both perimeter and field membrane sheets

in accordance with the manufacturer’s most current specifications and details. B. Adhere the membrane, applying adhesive to both the membrane and the surface to which it is

being bonded. Do not apply bonding adhesive along the splice edge of the membrane to be heat welded over adjoining sheet.

C. Install adjoining membrane sheets in the same manner in accordance with the manufacturer’s

specifications. 3.5 FLASHING A. Flashing of parapets, curbs, expansion joints and other parts of the roof must be performed

using reinforced membrane. Non-reinforced membrane can be used for flashing pipe penetrations, sealant pockets, scuppers, as well as inside and outside corners when the use of pre-fabricated accessories is not feasible.

B. Follow manufacturer’s typical flashing procedures for all wall, curb, and penetration flashing,

including metal edging/coping and roof drain applications. 3.6 WALKWAYS A. Install walkways at all traffic concentration points (such as roof hatches, access doors, rooftop

ladders, etc.) and all locations as identified on the drawings. 3.7 DAILY SEAL A. On phased roofing, when the completion of flashings and terminations is not achieved by the

end of the work day, a daily seal must be performed to temporarily close the membrane to prevent water infiltration.

END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07620-1

SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS


1.2 SUMMARY A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary to provide sheet metal flashing and trim as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. TPO roofing system is specified in Section 07531 – THERMOPLASTIC SHEET

ROOFING. 2. Joint sealers are specified in Section 07900 - JOINT SEALERS. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s product literature and installation instructions for each product

specified. C. Samples: 1. Submit 8 inch square Samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed sheet metal

flashing and trim applications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and that has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07620-2

B. Reference Standards: 1. Except where indicated otherwise, comply with applicable recommendations and details of Architectural Sheet Metal Manual by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA). C. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL FLASHING MATERIALS A. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14, prefinished or standard mill finish

as indicated. 1. Thickness/Gage: As indicated on Drawings but in no case less than .019”. 2. Color: a. Exposed-to-View: To be selected by the Professional. b. Concealed: Standard mill finish. B. Flashing for plumbing vent pipes and other mechanical devices that extend through roof shall

be .024” thick aluminum. Upon written request from the Contractor, rubber or synthetic molded boot flashings may be considered by the Department. Color of exposed flashings shall match color of roofing as approved by the Professional.

2.2 SHEET METAL CLADDING MATERIALS A. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14, .032 inch thick, factory prefinished

with double baked enamel to meet or exceed MIL-C-5541 specifications. 1. Color: To be selected by the Professional. 2. Application: Cladding of fascia, rakes, precast concrete coping and miscellaneous trim

where indicated on the Drawings.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07620-3

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL AND ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Aluminum. B. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part noncorrosive metal seam cementing compound, specifically

designed for exterior/interior nonmoving joints including riveted joints. C. Adhesive: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof, weather-

resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet. D. Slip Sheet: 5 lb. rosin-sized building paper. E. Bituminous Coating: Sulphur-free bituminous compound complying with SSPC-Paint 12. F. Reglets: Metal units of type and profile indicated, noncorrosive, and compatible with flashing

specified. G. Accessories: Provide metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory

components of size and gage required for performance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, surfaces, and conditions where sheet metal flashing and cladding are to be

installed. Correct defects potentially detrimental to proper performance of flashing or cladding installations. Do not proceed with installation of flashing or cladding until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Installation of sheet metal flashing and cladding will be considered as indication of

acceptance of substrates. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install flashings, counterflashings, and cladding in accordance with Reference Standards and as indicated on Drawings. Provide water-tight and weatherproof performance throughout. B. Anchor work in place with noncorrosive fasteners, adhesives, setting compounds, tapes, or other approved materials and devices. C. Provide for thermal expansion and building movements. Provide sealant-filled hooked flanges allowing for minimum 1 inch embedment of interlocked metal. Space joints at intervals not to exceed 24 feet. Conceal expansion components where possible. D. Fabricate sheet metal with flat-lock seams; solder with type of solder and flux recommended by metal manufacturer.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07620-4

E. Where use of slip sheet is restricted or otherwise impractical, coat back side of metal with bituminous coating where required to separate metals from corrosive substrates including cementitious materials, wood, or other absorbent materials. F. Seal moving joints with elastomeric sealant in compliance with requirements specified in Section 07900 - JOINT SEALERS. G. Nail flanges of expansion joint units to substrates; space nails 6 inches on centers maximum. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean metal surfaces of soldering flux and other substances that may cause corrosion. B. Protect flashings from damage due to construction activities until acceptance. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07710-1

SECTION 07710 - MANUFACTURED ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS


1.2 SUMMARY A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary to provide manufactured roof specialties (metal soffit system, metal rain removal system, and related accessory components) as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Sheet metal cladding is specified in Section 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s product literature and installation instructions for each product

specified. 2. Submit color chips of manufacturer’s full range of colors for the Professional’s selection. 3. Submit three samples, each 12 inches in length, of each specified product. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. Except where indicated otherwise, comply with applicable recommendations and details of Architectural Sheet Metal Manual by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA).

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07710-2

B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work. 1.5 DELIEVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 1. B. Store products in original packaging, on flat surface, under cover, stacked no more than 12 boxes high. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL RAIN REMOVAL SYSTEM

A. Aluminum Rain Removal System: 3105-H26 aluminum sheet gutters, downspouts and accessory components.

1. Gutter Style: 4 inch wide gutters to be sized per building application. 2. Thickness: nominal 0.032. 3. Hanger System: strap hanger used in combination with roof apron. 4. Downspout Style: 3” x 4” nominal downspouts 5. Thickness: nominal 0.024. 6. Leaf Guard Style: Leaf Relief – SN5200 7. Finish: Two-coat including corrosion-inhibiting primer and baked-on, high-performance acrylic topcoat. 8. Color: As selected by the Professional from manufacturer’s standard range. 9. Product/Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated in the Work include the following: Alcoa Building Products, Inc. ATAS International W.P. Hickman Co., Inc.

or equal as approved by the Professional

B. Accessories – Provide aluminum accessories to include roof aprons, end caps, inside and outside miters, sealant material, expansion joints, and downspout clips by gutter and downspout manufacturer.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07710-3

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal soffits and rain removal systems in accordance with Reference

Standards, as indicated on Drawings, and in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Anchor work in place using noncorrosive fasteners, adhesives, setting compounds, tapes,

and other materials and devices recommended by manufacturer of material or system. 2. Provide for thermal expansion and building movements. 3. Attach soffit panels to substrate interlocked and lapped for weathertight installation,

nails concealed; install horizontal components true to level and vertical components true to plumb.

4. Attach gutters to substrate. Lap, rivet and seal all joints together to ensure weathertight

installation. Install downspouts true to plumb. 5. Position soffit slats perpendicular to wall and trim panels to fit soffit span as indicated.

Miter corners at fascia/rake intersections using matching F-channel trim. Install hold-down clips or other approved device at fascia connections to counteract wind uplift.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Touch-up damaged metal coatings. B. Protect installed manufactured roof specialties from damage and deterioration until Final Inspection. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07720-1

SECTION 07720 - ROOF HATCHES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS


1.2 SUMMARY A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary to provide a roof hatch as

shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Metal flashing is specified in Section 07620 – SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM.

2. Rough carpentry is specified in Section 06100 – ROUGH CARPENTRY

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s product literature indicating detailed product characteristics and

installation instructions. 2. Submit Shop Drawings showing mounting details, location and layout of primary

components. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. Except where indicated otherwise, comply with applicable recommendations and details of Architectural Sheet Metal Manual by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA).

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07720-2

B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work. C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed roof hatch

installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and that has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

1.5 DELIEVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 1. B. Store products in original packaging, on flat surface, under cover. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Submit manufacturer’s guarantee for workmanship, materials, and leakage for a period of 5

years following date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard units, modified as necessary to comply with requirements. Shop fabricate each unit to greatest extent possible.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide roof hatch by one of the following:

Bilco Company – Type S roof hatch Babcock Davis Karp Associates

or equal as approved by the Professional 2.3 ROOF HATCH A. Furnish and install, where indicated on the plans, 36” long x 30” wide metal roof hatch or as

required to fit existing opening. The roof hatch shall be pre-assembled with a single leaf. B. Performance characteristics: 1. Cover shall be reinforced to support a minimum live load of 40 psf with a maximum

deflection of 1/150th of the span and a 140 psf wind uplift. 2. Operation of the cover shall be smooth and easy with controlled operation throughout the

entire arc of opening and closing.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07720-3

3. Operation of the cover shall not be affected by temperature. 4. Entire hatch shall be weather tight with fully welded corner joints on cover and curb. 5. Hatch shall be made up of a galvanized curb and cover. C. Cover shall be 14 gauge paint bond G-90 galvanized steel with a 3” beaded flange with formed

reinforcing members. Cover shall have a heavy extruded EPDM rubber gasket that is bonded to the cover interior to assure a continuous seal when compressed to the top surface of the curb.

D. Cover insulation shall be 1” thick fiberglass, fully covered and protected by a metal liner. E. Curb shall be 12” high, 14 gauge paint bond G-90 galvanized steel. The curb shall be formed

with a 3 ½” flange with 7/16” holes provided for securing to the roof deck. The curb shall be equipped with an integral metal capflashing of the same gauge and material as the curb, fully welded at the corners, and bent inward to hold single ply roofing membrane securely in place.

F. Curb insulation shall be rigid, high density fiberboard of 1” thickness on outside of curb. G. Lifting mechanisms shall be compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes to

provide, smooth, easy, and controlled cover operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing. The upper tube shall be the outer tube to prevent accumulation of moisture, grit and debris inside the lower tube assembly. The lower tube shall interlock with a flanged support shoe.

H. Hardware: 1. Heavy pintle hinges shall be provided. 2. Cover shall be equipped with a spring latch with interior and exterior turn handles. 3. Roof hatch shall be equipped with a spring latch with interior and exterior turn handles. 4. The latch strike shall be a stamped component, bolted to the curb assembly. 5. Cover shall automatically lock in the open position, with a rigid hold open arm, equipped

with a 1” diameter red vinyl grip handle to permit easy release for closing. 6. Compression spring tubes shall be an anti-corrosive composite material and all other

hardware shall be zinc plated and chromate sealed. 7. Cover hardware shall be bolted into heavy gauge channel reinforcing, welded to the

underside of the cover and concealed within the insulation space. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittals.

Locate units level, plumb, and in proper alignment with adjacent work. 1. Test units for proper function and adjust until proper operation is achieved. 2. Repair finishes damaged during installation. 3. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07720-4

3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Touch-up damaged metal coatings. B. Protect installed roof hatches from damage until Final Inspection. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07900-1

SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS


1.2 SUMMARY A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary for sealing joints throughout the construction as required to provide a positive barrier against passage of moisture, air, and radon gas. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Sealing joints for penetration of ducts, piping, conduit, and similar items is specified in Mechanical Specification sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s product literature and installation instructions for each product

specified. C. Samples: 1. Submit Sample of each joint sealer product specified. D. Product Test Reports: 1. Submit test reports for each type of joint sealer indicated. E. Material Certificates: 1. Submit material certificates, signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material complies with or exceeds specified requirements and are suitable for use intended.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07900-2

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for

each different product required. B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an installer having a minimum of 5 years prior successful

experience with installation of joint sealers of type and extent equivalent to this Project. C. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the


1.5 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. System Performance: Provide joint sealers that have been produced and installed to establish

and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under following

conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint

sealer manufacturer.

2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealer manufacturer or below 40 degrees F.

3. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers where joint widths

are less or more than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application intended. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until substrate

surfaces are acceptable including removal of contaminants capable of interfering with sealant adhesion.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with applicable provisions of Section 01620. B. Deliver materials to Project Site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels containing data regarding manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07900-3

C. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers' recommendations to prevent deterioration or damage from moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS – GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers, and related materials that are compatible

with one another and with joint substrates. B. Color: Provide color of exposed joint sealers as selected by the Professional from

manufacturers' standard range 1. Color for each sealant installation shall match color of adjacent surfaces. a. Should a standard color not be available for a particular application, provide a

specially formulated color at no additional cost to the Department. 2. At concealed locations and at partially or fully exposed installations, where approved by

the Professional, use standard gray color joint sealer. 2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALERS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Manufacturer's standard, chemically curing, elastomeric

sealant of base polymer indicated, complying with ASTM C 920 requirements including those referenced for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.

1. One-Part Nonacid-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; complying with

following requirements for Uses and additional joint movement capability; Uses NT, M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

2. Application: For following exterior joints: a. Joints in masonry. b. Perimeter joints at frames of doors and windows. B. One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A,

and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes.

1. Application: For interior joints. C. Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses T, M, G, A, and, as

applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07900-4

1. Application: For exterior joints in pavements. D. One-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses T, NT, M, G, A, and,

as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 1. Application: For joints at interior floors. E. Products/Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of following: 1. One-Part Nonacid-Curing Silicone Sealant Dow Corning 790 by Dow Corning Corp. Silpruf SCS 2000 by General Electric Co. Rhodorsil 5C by Rhone-Poulenc Inc. or equal as approved by the Professional 2. One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant Dow Corning 786 by Dow Corning Corp. 863 #345 White by Pecora Corp. Proglaze White by Tremco, Inc. or equal as approved by the Professional 3. Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant Dynatred by Pecora Corp. Sikaflex-2c NS by Sika Corp. THC-901 by Tremco, Inc. or equal as approved by the Professional 4. One-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant Permapol RC-1 by Products Research & Chemical Corp. Sikaflex-1a by Sika Corp. Sikaflex-15LM by Sika Corp. or equal as approved by the Professional 2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALERS A. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, one part, nonsag, mildew-resistant,

acrylic-emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, formulated to be paintable and recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 percent.

1. Application: For following interior joints: a. Perimeter joints at frames of interior doors and windows.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07900-5

b. Perimeter joints at interior side of exterior door and window frames where painted finish abuts frame.

c. Other interior joints between different materials where elastomeric sealant is not

indicated. B. Products/Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of following: 1. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant AC-20 by Pecora Corp. Sonolac by Sonneborn Building Products Tremco Acrylic Latex 834 by Tremco, Inc. or equal as approved by the Professional 2.4 JOINT SEALER BACKING A. General: Provide nonstaining sealer backings selected for compatibility with joint substrates,

sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; approved by sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonwaxing, nonextruding

strips of flexible, nongassing plastic foam of material indicated below, nonabsorbent to water and gas; of size, shape, and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

1. Either open-cell polyurethane foam or closed-cell polyethylene foam, subject to approval

of sealant manufacturer, for cold-applied sealants only. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where required.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion

of sealant to joint substrates. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Nonstaining chemical cleaners acceptable to

manufacturers of sealants and backing materials; not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials; do not leave oily residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-service performance.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent type compatible with joint sealers and surfaces

adjacent to joints. D. Bituminous Fiber Joint Filler: Preformed strips of asphalt saturated fiberboard complying

with ASTM D 1751.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07900-6

1. Application: Joints at exterior concrete paving. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints to receive joint sealers for compliance with requirements for joint

configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations of

joint sealer manufacturer and following requirements: 1. Remove dust, oil, grease, water, surface dirt, frost, and other substances and debris that

may interfere with adhesion of joint sealer. 2. Clean concrete, masonry, and similar porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing,

grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers. Remove loose particles remaining by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass, and other nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means

not harmful to substrates; use methods and materials that will not leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers.

B. Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer. Confine

primers to areas of joint sealer bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjacent surfaces.

C. Masking: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining

surfaces that may be permanently stained or damaged by sealant contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BACKINGS A. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support for sealants during application.

Position joint fillers to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths for optimum sealant movement capability.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 07900-7

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers. 3. Remove wet joint fillers prior to sealant application; replace with dry material.

4. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint fillers, between sealants and backs of joints, and similar conditions where adhesion of sealant will result in sealant failure.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS A. Install sealants using proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully

wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths.

B. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to skinning or

curing, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated. Eliminate air pockets and ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint recess. Remove excess sealant material from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 6A in ASTM C 962 unless indicated

otherwise. 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove excess sealant material or smears adjacent to joints as work progresses using methods

and materials approved by joint sealer manufacturer. 3.6 PROTECTION A. During and after curing period, protect joint sealers from contact with contaminating

substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes. Ensure that joints are free from deterioration or damage at time of acceptance. Should damage or deterioration occur, cut out and remove defective joint sealers and reseal joints with new materials to provide repaired areas indistinguishable from original work.

END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08110-1

SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS


1.2 SUMMARY A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary to provide a complete installation of steel frames as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Masonry work is specified in Section 04200 - UNIT MASONRY. 2. Door hardware is specified in Section 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE. 3. Painting is specified in Section 09900 - PAINTING. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s product data for each type of frame specified. Include details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, label compliance, profiles, and finishes. a. Submit manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved

by the Professional, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used in the work.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Show fabrication and installation of steel frames. Include details of each frame type,

frame elevations, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of hardware and reinforcements, details of joints and connections, and anchorage and accessory items.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08110-2

a. Provide schedule of frames using same reference numbers for openings and details as those on the Drawings. D. Steel Products Procurement Act Certification: 1. Submit certification for steel products used in the Project pursuant with the provisions of the Steel Products Procurement Act (ACT of 1978, March 3, P.L. 6, No. 3 1-7) (73. P.S. 1881-87) which, in part, requires that if any steel products are to be used or supplied in the performance of a contract, only steel products, as defined by the ACT, that are made in the United States may be used. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. Comply with applicable provisions of Steel Door Institute Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100) 2. Comply with Steel Doors and Frames - Standards and Specifications by SDI. B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the


1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 1. B. Deliver materials to site at appropriate intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. C. Deliver frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job

storage. D. Inspect frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided

refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the Department; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed.

E. Store frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4 inch high wood

blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters capable of developing a humidity chamber. Should cardboard door wrapper become wet, remove carton immediately.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08110-3

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide steel frames and related accessories by one of the following:

Steelcraft Manufacturing Company Ceco Door Products Republic Builders Products or equal as approved by the Professional 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled,

complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: Commercial quality carbon steel complying with ASTM A 366 and

ASTM A 568. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated carbon steel of commercial quality complying with ASTM A 526; ASTM A 525 G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate from minimum 18 gage galvanized steel sheet. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units complying with ASTM A 153,

Class C or D as applicable. Furnish hot-dip galvanized items where built into exterior walls and elsewhere as shown or scheduled.

F. Primer: Shop-applied rust-inhibitive enamel, air-dry or bake-dry, suitable as base for

specified finish paints. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from

defects, warp, or buckle. Where possible, fit and assemble units in plant. To ensure proper handling at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment. Comply with following SDI requirements:

1. Exterior: ANSI/SDI-100, Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 2, minimum 16 gage

galvanized steel faces. B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors from cold-rolled steel. C. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and mouldings

from either cold-rolled or hot rolled steel. D. Fabricate exterior doors, panels and frames from galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom

edges of exterior door panels as integral part of door construction or add inverted 16 gage steel channel inserts.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08110-4

E. Exposed Fasteners: Unless indicated otherwise, provide countersunk flat Phillips head screws and bolts.

F. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or

scheduled, provide thermal insulating door and frame assemblies tested in accordance with ASTM C236.

1. Unless indicated otherwise, provide thermal-rated assemblies with minimum U factor of

0.24 BTU (/hr x ft2 x degrees F). G. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and similar openings as

indicated on Drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings unless indicated otherwise. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered and welded corners; grind smooth. a. Form exterior frames from minimum 16 gage galvanized steel. H. Silencers: Except at weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers at strike jambs

of single door frames and 2 silencers at heads of double door frames. Provide rubber-tipped silencers at all frames.

I. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 26 gauge galvanized steel plaster guards or mortar boxes

welded to frame at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials may obstruct hardware operation.

J. Hardware Preparation: Prepare frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in

accordance with approved Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 series specifications for door and frame preparation.

1. Reinforce frames scheduled to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping

for surface-applied hardware may be performed at Project site. 2. Locate hardware as indicated on approved Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, in

accordance with Recommended Locations for Builder’s Hardware published by Door and Hardware Institute.

K. Shop Painting 1. Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of galvanized steel frames. a. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign substances

before applying paint.

2. Apply shop coat of prime paint at even consistency to provide uniformly finished surfaces ready to receive finish paint.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08110-5

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel frames and accessories in accordance with approved Shop Drawings,

manufacturer's data, and as specified herein. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 Recommended Erection Instruction for Steel Frames unless indicated otherwise. 1. Place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls. Set accurately in position,

plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders.

2. At masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike sides. a. At hinge side, position one anchor (vertically) at each hinge level. b. At strike side, position one anchor at strike level; position remaining anchors to

correspond with location of anchors at hinge side. 3. At masonry construction, fill frame jambs solid with mortar unless indicated otherwise. 4. At in-place masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with

countersunk machine screws and masonry anchorage devices (3 per jamb). Provide frames with flat bar and steel sleeve at fastening locations.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately following erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas

of shop-applied prime coat and apply compatible air-drying touch-up primer. At galvanized components, use an approved galvanize repair paint.

B. Protection: Clean exposed surfaces from foreign substances and protect installations from

damage or deterioration until final inspection or acceptance. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08120 - 1

SECTION 08120 - ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS A. The specifications sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and “Divi-

sion 1 – General Requirements” form a part of this section by this reference thereto, and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish labor, material, equipment and appliances necessary to provide a complete installation

of aluminum doors and frames as indicated on Drawings and specified herein. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Door hardware is specified in SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE 2. Glass is specified in SECTION 08810 - GLASS 3. Sealants are specified in SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced below establish minimum requirements for materials, systems and

execution which may be specified in this Section. ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION

Designation System for Aluminum Finishes AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)

AAMA 501.1 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Using Dynamic Pressure

AAMA 611 Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum AAMA 1503 Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation

Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections


ASTM A 36/A 36M Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A 123/A 123M Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products ASTM A 153/A 153M Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A 1008/A 1008M Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-

Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability

ASTM A 1011/A 1011M Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1 08120 - 2

With Improved Formability ASTM B 209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate ASTM B 221 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles,

and Tubes ASTM B 308/B 308M Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles ASTM B 429 Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube ASTM C 920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM C 1363 Standard Test Method for the Thermal Performance of Building

Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus ASTM E 283 Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and

Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen

ASTM E 330 Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

ASTM E 331 Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference


AWS A5.10/A5.10M Bare Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Welding Electrodes and Rods

THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS

SSPC-PS Guide 12.00 Guide to Zinc-Rich Coating Systems

SSPC-SP COM Surface Preparation Commentary for Steel and Concrete Substrates

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer’s descriptive literature and specifications for products specified;

include installation instructions and maintenance data. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit manufacturer’s published details modified to suit design conditions. Verify

measurements and conditions at Project site. Record field dimensions on Shop Drawings. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility 1. Obtain aluminum doors and frames from a single manufacturer. B. Reference Standards 1. ASTM E 283, Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and

Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08120 - 3

2. ASTM E 331, Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by

Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. C. Performance Requirements - Framing Components 1. Air Infiltration: Must not exceed .06 CFM per square foot of fixed area when tested in

accordance with ASTM E 283. 2. Water Infiltration: No water penetration at a test pressure of 6.24 PSF when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect aluminum doors and frames during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage and

deterioration. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for on-site storage and protection.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide aluminum windows by one the following:

YKK America, Inc. Kawneer Company, Inc. Old Castle Building Envelope

or equal as approved by the Professional 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Door Frames and Sidelight Frames 1. General: Provide medium style swing doors with 3 ½” stile, flush glazing system on all

sides with no projecting stops or face joints for glass framing members. 2. Framing Members, Transition Members, Mullions: ASTM B 221, 6063-T5 extrusions. 3. Fasteners: Stainless steel or cadmium plated fasteners for screws, anchors, miscellaneous

fasteners, and internal components. 4. Glazing: Provide resilient, elastomeric extrusions both sides of glass and panels. 5. Weatherstripping: Manufacturer’s standard weather seal of dense, semi-rigid polymeric

material which will remain resilient and retain its weathering ability under temperature extremes.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1 08120 - 4

6. Aluminum Finishes: Kawneer #17 clear (AA-M12C22A31). B. Aluminum Doors 1. Extrusions: ASTM B 221, 6063-T5 extrusions. a. Stiles and Rails: Minimum .125 inch thick. b. Glazing Mouldings: Minimum .050 inch thick. 2. Door Corners: Both mechanically fastened and welded. 3. Glazing Stops: Snap-in type with elastomeric extrusion gaskets. 4. Fasteners: Stainless steel or cadmium plated fasteners for screws, anchors,

miscellanenous fasteners, and internal components. Exposed fasteners not permitted. 5. Weatherstripping

a) Door Bottoms: Elastomeric blade sweep strip applied with concealed fasteners. b) Astragal: Provide dense, semi-rigid, polymeric astragal at meeting stiles of pairs

of doors. 6. Aluminum Finishes: Kawneer #17 clear (AA-M12C22A31). 7. Glass: Preglaze doors with ¼ inch thick tempered glass. 8. Hardware: Manufacturer’s standard as selected by Architect. C. Accessory Components 1. Setting Shims: Aluminum wedges and plates finished with heavy coat of fibrated, alkali-

resistant bituminous coating meeting requirements of MIL-P-6883. 2. Anchors: Devices for securing aluminum framing members to various substrates may be

stainless steel or cadmium plated. Setting anchors in concrete or masonry may be wedge anchors (Red Heads) or nylon composition. Rawl plugs not permitted.

3. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12 except containing no asbestos fibers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units plumb, level, and true to line without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or

panels. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established lines indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.

B. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or

electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08120 - 5

1. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry with bituminous paint. C. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface-mounted hardware items. Comply with

hardware manufacturer’s instructions and template requirements. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible.

D. Set sill members and similar components in bed of sealant to provide weather tight

construction. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and for weathertight closure. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Promptly after installation, clean completed system inside and outside. Exercise care to avoid damage of finishes. B. Clean glass surfaces and remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances from aluminum surfaces. C. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to

ensure that aluminum doors and frames will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08360-1

SECTION 08360 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS


1.2 SUMMARY A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary to provide a complete installation of sectional overhead doors as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Masonry work is specified in Section 04200 - UNIT MASONRY. 2. Metal Fabrications are specified in Section 05500 – METAL FABRICATIONS. 3. Painting is specified in Section 09900 - PAINTING. 1.3 REFERENCES

ANSI/DASMA 102 – American National Standard Specifications for Section Overhead Type Doors.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's roughing-in diagrams and installation instructions for each type and size of overhead door. Include operating instructions and maintenance data. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit for special components and installations not fully dimensioned or detailed in

Product Data. Verify measurements and conditions at Project site. Record field dimensions on Shop Drawings.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08360-2

D. Steel Products Procurement Act Certification: 1. Submit certification for steel products used in the Project pursuant with the provisions of the Steel Products Procurement Act (ACT of 1978, March 3, P.L. No. 3 1-7) (73. P.S. 1881-87) which, in part, requires that if any steel products are to be used or supplied in the performance of a contract, only steel products, as defined by the ACT, that are made in the United States may be used. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide each sectional overhead door as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer. Include hardware, accessories, mounting, and installation components. B. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices required for installation of overhead sectional door units. Provide setting drawings, templates, and instructions for installation. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. C. Structural Performance Requirements: Design and reinforce overhead sectional doors to withstand a 20 pound per square foot wind load pressure. D. Installer: Installation of sectional doors shall be performed by the authorize representative of the manufacturer. E. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s limited door and operators system warranty for 10 years against delamination

of polyurethane foam form steel face and all other components for 3 years or 20,000 cycles, whichever comes first.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 1. B. Protect overhead sectional doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage and

deterioration. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for on-site storage and protection.


D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08360-3

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide sectional overhead doors by one of the following: Overhead Door Corporation Fimbel Door Corporation or equal as approved by the Professional B. For ease of reference, sectional overhead doors are products of Overhead Door Corporation, similar to 592 Series Thermacore Insulated Steel Door.

2.2 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS - GENERAL A. Provide insulated, sectional door assembly of metal/foam/metal sandwich panel construction,

with ship-lap design with rounded water channels.

2.3 MATERIALS A. Units shall have the following characteristics: 1. Panel Thickness: 2” 2. Exterior Surface: Ribbed, textured. 3. Exterior Steel: 0.015, hot –dipped galvanized. 4. End Stiles: 16 gauge with thermal break 5. Standard Springs: 10,000 cycles 6. Insulation: CFC-free and HCFC-free polyurethane, fully encapsulated. 7. Thermal Values: R-value of 17.50; U-value of 0.057. 8. Air Infiltration: 0.08 cfm at 15 mph; 0.08 cfm at 25 mph B. Finish and Color: Two coat baked-on polyester with gray exterior and gray interior color. C. Windload Design: ANSI/DASMA 102 standards and as required by code. D. Hardware: Galvanized steel hinges and fixtures. Ball bearing rollers with hardened steel races. E. Lock: Keyed Lock F. Weatherstripping: EPDM rubber bulb-type strip at bottom. Header seal and jamb weatherstripping. G. Track: Provide track as recommended by manufacturer to suit loading required and clearances

available. 1. Size - 2 inch 2. Type – Standard lift H. Manual Operation – Chain hoist.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08360-4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. Take field dimension and examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under which this work is to be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Strictly comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and allow for maintenance. B. Coordinate installation with adjacent work, including mechanical contractor’s work, to ensure

proper clearances and allow for maintenance. C. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. D. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure, below mechanical equipment, where

applicable. Secure tracks to structural members only. E. Fit and align door assembly including hardware. F. Instruct the Department’s personnel in proper operating procedures and maintenance schedule.

3.3 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately following installation, clean exposed surfaces of grease, dirt, and other foreign matter. Replace damaged or otherwise defective door components. B. Lubricate, test, and adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion, with weathertight fit at entire perimeter. C. Protect installation from damage or deterioration until Substantial Completion. D Train the Department's maintenance personnel regarding procedures and schedules related to

door operation, servicing, and preventive maintenance. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29, Phase 1.1 08520 - 1

SECTION 08520 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS

A. The specification sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and “Division 1 – General Requirements” form a part of this section by reference thereto, and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Scope of Work: 1. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary to provide a complete

installation of commercial grade, aluminum window systems as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Window stools are specified in Section 06650 – SOLID POLYMER FABRICATIONS. 2. Joint sealers are specified in Section 07900 - JOINT SEALERS. 3. Glass is specified in Section 08810 – GLASS. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced below establish minimum requirements for materials, systems and execution which may be specified in this Section. AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)

AAMA 501.1 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Using Dynamic Pressure

AAMA 611 Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum

AAMA 1503 Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections


ASTM A 36/A 36M Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A 123/A 123M Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products ASTM A 153/A 153M Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

D.G.S. 962-29, Phase 1.1 08520 - 2

ASTM A 1008/A 1008M Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability

ASTM A 1011/A 1011M Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability

ASTM B 209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate ASTM B 221 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles,

and Tubes ASTM B 308/B 308M Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles ASTM B 429 Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube ASTM C 920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM C 1363 Standard Test Method for the Thermal Performance of Building

Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus ASTM E 283 Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and

Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen

ASTM E 330 Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference

ASTM E 331 Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference


AWS A5.10/A5.10M Bare Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Welding Electrodes and Rods

THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS

SSPC-PS Guide 12.00 Guide to Zinc-Rich Coating Systems

SSPC-SP COM Surface Preparation Commentary for Steel and Concrete Substrates

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature and specifications for products specified;

include installation instructions and maintenance data. 2. Submit profiles and dimensions of individual components. 3. Submit data on hardware, accessories, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit manufacturer's published details modified to suit design conditions. Verify

measurements and conditions at Project site. Record field dimensions on Shop

D.G.S. 962-29, Phase 1.1 08520 - 3

Drawings. Provide layout and installation details, including anchors. Include location of weep holes, panning details, hardware information, glazing details and accessory information.

C. Samples: 1. Submit typical window corner with glazing beads. 2. Submit color sample of finishes. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum window system components from a single

manufacturer with not less than five years experience in the fabrication of commercial custom aluminum windows.

B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installation of

aluminum windows similar in material, design, and extent to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Source Quality Control 1. Air Infiltration a. Meets or exceeds ASTM E 283-91 b. Maximum air infiltration 0.10 CFM/Ft.² of crack length with differential static pressure across window unit of 6.24 PSF. 2. Water Infiltration a. Meets or exceeds ASTM E331-93 b. There shall be no leakage as defined in the test method at a static air pressure

differential of 12 psf operable, 15 psf fixed. 3. Uniform Load Structural Load Test: Provide aluminum window systems that comply

with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.A 440-05, voluntary specifications for aluminum and polyvinylchloride (PVC) prime windows and glass doors, guidelines for specified AW rated products.

4. Thermal Movement: Provide for thermal movement caused by 180 degrees F surface temperature, without causing buckling stresses on glass, joint seal failure, undue stress on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance, or detrimental effects.

5. Acoustical Performance: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 90 and ASTM E 1332, the Sound Transmission Class (STC) shall not be less than 33 for operable, 32 for fixed units.

6. Life Cycle Testing: When tested in accordance with AAMA 910, there shall be no damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or any other damage that would cause the window to be inoperable. Resistance to air leakage and water penetration resistance test results shall not exceed the gateway performance.

7. Thermal Transmittance Test (U-Value) a. When tested in accordance with AAMA 1503, the U-Value shall not be more

than 0.52 BTU/hr/sf/°F for project out windows. b. When tested in accordance with AAMA 1503, the U-Value shall not be more

than 0.39 BTU/hr/sf/°F for fixed windows.

D.G.S. 962-29, Phase 1.1 08520 - 4

c. Condensation Resistance Factor (CRFf): A minimum of 57 (Fixed), 53 (Operable)

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check window openings by field measurements before fabrication and

show recorded measurement on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee

opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum windows without field measurements.

1.7 PROJECT WARRANTY A. Windows: Warrant for two years against defects in material or workmanship under normal use. 1.8 DELIVERY, STOARGE AND HANDLING A. Protect aluminum window system components and assemblies during transit, storage, and

handling to prevent damage and deterioration. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for on-site storage and protection.

B. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage, and handling to comply with

manufacturer's directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, and from other causes.


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide aluminum windows by one the following:

YKK AP America, Inc. Kawneer Company, Inc. Old Castle Building Envelope

or equal as approved by the Professional 2.2 PRODUCTS

A. For ease of reference, aluminum windows and frames indicated are products of YKK AP

America, Inc. Refer to Manufacturers paragraph of this Section for listing of approved manufacturers.

D.G.S. 962-29, Phase 1.1 08520 - 5

1. Fixed Windows: YKK AP YOW 225 TU ThermaBond Plus Aluminum Window

System 2 1/4” deep frame 2. Project Out Windows: YKK AP YOW 225 TU ThermaBond Plus Aluminum

Window System 2 1/4” deep frame 2.3 MATERIALS A. Aluminum (Windows and Components): Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for

type of use and finish indicated, complying with the requirements of standards indicated below. B. AAMA Designation: AW-65 (Operable), AW-100 (Fixed) C. Description: The windows shall be extruded aluminum with integral structural thermal break;

2 ¼” frame depth; vents shall be flush with frame and have mitered corner construction; factory-assembled.

D. Configuration: The thermally broken windows shall be fixed and project-out as indicated on

the Drawings. E. Thermal Barrier: Provide continuous thermal barrier by means of a poured and debridged

pocket consisting of a two-part, chemically curing high density polyurethane which is bonded to the aluminum.

2.4 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing: Glazing method shall be a wet/dry type in accordance with manufacturer’s

standards. Exterior glazing tape with silicone cap bead; 1” insulating units; Interior EPDM wedge gaskets; Aluminum interior glazing beads; Factory or bench glazed.

2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Operable Hardware for Project-out Ventilators 1. Fastener: Cast White Bronze Cam Locks 2. Ventilators shall be hung on heavy-duty stainless steel four bar hinges with brass friction

shoes. 3. Deflection stops 4. Weep covers B. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer’s standard permanent,

non-migrating types in hardness recommended by manufacturer, compatible with sealants, and suitable for system performance requirements.

C. Framing system gaskets, sealants, and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer for joint

type.

D.G.S. 962-29, Phase 1.1 08520 - 6

D. Sealants and joint fillers for joints at perimeter of window system as specified in Section 7900 Joint Sealants.

E. Perimeter Anchors: When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material

and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action. F. Glazing: Factory Glazing as specified in “Glazing” Section. G. Exterior Panning: Extruded aluminum, 6063-T5 alloy and temper, extruded to profiles and

details indicated. Seal exterior joints with manufacturer’s standard sealant to assure water-tight joints.

H. Insect Screens: Extruded aluminum frames, 6063-T5 alloy and temper, joined at corners; 18 x

16 mesh aluminum screen cloth; frames finished to match aluminum windows; splines shall be extruded vinyl, removable to permit re-screening.

2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum windows in accordance with approved shop drawings. B. Fabricate components per manufacturer’s installation instructions. When assembled,

components will have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformation. 2. Accurately fit joints; make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture

migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible. C. Window Frame Joinery: Mitered and mechanically clipped and/or staked. Factory sealed

frame and corner joints. D. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling

components and anchoring windows. E. Fabricate windows that are re-glazable without dismantling sash or framing. F. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate aluminum windows with an integral, concealed,

low-conductance thermal barrier; located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side; in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact. Thermal barriers shall be designed in accordance with AAMA TIR A8.

D.G.S. 962-29, Phase 1.1 08520 - 7

2.5 FINISHES

A. Factory Finishing 1. Anodic Coating: Electrolytic color coating followed by an organic seal applied

in accordance with the requirements of AAMA 612-02. Aluminum extrusions shall be produced from quality controlled billets meeting AA-6063-T5.

a. Exposed Surfaces shall be free of scratches and other serious blemishes. b. Extrusions shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodic oxide treatment

and then sealed with an organic coating applied with an electodepostion process. c. The anodized coating shall comply with all of the requirements of AAMA 612-

02: Voluntary Specifications, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Combined Coatings of Anodic Oxide and Transparent Organic Coatings on Architectural Aluminum. Testing shall demonstrate the ability of the finish to resist damage from mortar, salt spray, and chemicals commonly found on construction sites, and to resist the loss of color and gloss.

d. Overall coating thickness for finishes shall be a minimum of 0.7 mils. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Window openings shall conform to details, dimensions and tolerances shown on the window

manufacturer's approved shop drawings. 1. Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show

recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements, fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.

B. Conditions which may adversely affect the window installation must be corrected before installation commences. C. The wash down of the adjacent masonry must be completed before erection commences to prevent damage to the finish by the cleaning materials. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Windows specified under this section shall be installed by experienced personnel. B. Install windows in openings in strict accordance with approved shop drawings. 1. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames. 2. Anchor units securely to surrounding construction with approved fasteners. 3. The exterior joints between the windows, trim and mullions shall be properly sealed watertight with an approved sealant and neatly pointed. C. Attach ventilator hardware, as required, and adjust ventilators to operate smoothly free from twist and to be weather-tight when closed.

D.G.S. 962-29, Phase 1.1 08520 - 8

D. Repair any abraded areas of the factory finish. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Tests: The Department will select window units to be tested as soon as a representative

portion of the project has been installed, glazed, perimeter caulked and cured. Conduct tests for air infiltration and water penetration with manufacturer’s representative present. Tests not meeting specified performance requirements and units having deficiencies shall be corrected as part of the contract amount.

1. Testing: Testing shall be performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Testing

Standard shall be per AAMA 502 including reference to ASTM E783 for Air Infiltration Test and ASTM E1105 for Water Penetration Test.

a. Air Infiltration Tests: Conduct in accordance with ASTM E783. Tests shall be conducted at a minimum uniform static test pressure of 1.57 psf or as specified, but not to exceed 6.24 psf. The maximum allowable rates of air leakage for field testing shall not exceed 1.5 times the project specifications.

b. Water Penetration Tests: Water penetration tests shall be conducted at a static test pressure of 8 psf for Architectural, 6.00 psf for Heavy Commercial, and 3.00 psf for Commercial.

3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect installed product’s finish surfaces from damage during construction. Protect aluminum

window system from damage from grinding and polishing compounds, plaster, lime, acid, cement or other harmful contaminants.

B. Repair or replace damaged products. C. Window installer shall leave window surfaces clean after installation and ready to receive glass

and glazing. The window installer will not be responsible for final cleaning.

END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08710-1

SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS A. The specifications sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and

“Division 1 – General Requirements” form a part of this section by this reference thereto, and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.


installation of door hardware as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 2. Hardware specified herein is intended to include all necessary components required for

complete installation. Provide sufficient quantities of hardware items to fulfill the intent of the Contract Documents even though every item necessary for a complete hardware installation may not be specified. If hardware for a particular location or application is not specified herein, furnish hardware of similar design, function, finish, and quality equal to hardware specified for similar applications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s technical information for each item of hardware including

instructions for installation and maintenance of operating parts and finish. Include data necessary to show compliance with requirements.

C. Shop Drawings 1. Submit final Hardware Schedule in vertical format only. Maintain identical hardware

"set" number designations used herein. Include the following: a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Quantity of each item. d. Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on the Drawings.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08710-2

e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, codes, and similar identifications

contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Keying information. D. Samples: 1. Prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and prior to final ordering,

submit one sample of each type of exposed hardware unit, finished as required and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule.

a. Samples will be returned to supplier. Units which are acceptable and

remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison procedures may, after final check of operation, be used in the Work within limitations of keying coordination requirements.

E. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames, and other work to

be factory-prepared for installation of hardware. F. Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance

of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e.g., hollow metal frames) whose fabrication and delivery timing is crucial in maintaining the Project construction schedule.

G. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule clearly indicating how the Department’s

final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. 1.4 CODE COMPLIANCE A. Comply with requirements of the following: 1. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association Standards No.80 (Fire Doors and

Windows) and No.101 (Life Safety Code) Fire Marshals. 2. Department of Labor and Industry of Pennsylvania. 3. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act. 4. Local Building Codes.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08710-3

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. ANSI A156.18 Materials & Finishes Standard by BMHA. B. Single Source Responsibility: 1. Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from one

manufacturer. C. Supplier Qualifications: 1. Hardware supplier must be a recognized architectural finish hardware consultant (AHC),

with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware for a period of not less than 10 years and who is, or employs, an experienced architectural hardware consultant. Consultant must be available, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation with the Department and Contractor regarding Project hardware requirements.

D. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the


1.6 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY A. Submit written warranties signed by both manufacturer and supplier for the following: 1. Door Closers: 5 years from date of acceptance. 2. Exit Devices: 3 years from date of acceptance. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with applicable provisions of Section 01620. B. Packaging of hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware

supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container.

C. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to final hardware schedule, and

include basic installation instructions with each item or package. D. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of the hardware supplier and the hardware

installer until each is satisfied that the count is correct.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08710-4

E. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations (shop

or Project site) for installation. F. Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control

handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. The following manufacturers are used to establish a standard of quality for hardware

components indicated: 1. Kickplates, Push/Pulls: Rockwood Manufacturing Company 2. Thresholds: National Guard Products 3. Door Closers: Norton 4. Exit Devices: Sargent 5. Locksets, Deadbolts: Sargent 6. Cores: Best Locks The above item (Best Lock Cores) has been approved by the Department as a proprietary item. No other item will be accepted. Article 9, Paragraph 9.7, Substitution of Materials, of the General Conditions to the Construction Contract does not apply to the above item. 7. Butt Hinges: McKinney 8. Weatherstripping: National Guard Products 9. Surface Deadlocks: Yale 10. Overhead Holders: ABH B. Provide the required items of hardware by manufacturers indicated above or equal as approved

by the Professional.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08710-5

2.2 HARDWARE COMPONENTS - GENERAL A. Provide door hardware of quantity, type, manufacturer, function, and finish as specified and

scheduled herein. B. Scheduled Hardware: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other

distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware is indicated on the Door Hardware Schedule. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following:

1. Materials and Fabrication a. Hand of door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing, or hand of each door

leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown.

b. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use products which have manufacturer's

name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required UL labels and as otherwise acceptable to the Department.

1) Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders

only. c. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates,

generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.

1) Where necessary, furnish fasteners with expansion shields, toggle bolts,

hex bolts, and other anchors selected to suit substrate characteristics, as recommended by the hardware manufacturer, and as approved by the Department

d. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-

head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish.

e. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is

closed except where no standard units of the type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on the opposite face is exposed except where it is not feasible to adequately reinforce the work. In this case, provide sleeve for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.

f. Tools and Maintenance Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools

and maintenance instructions as needed for the Department’s continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

2. Hinges a. Where hinges are required to swing 180 degrees, furnish hinges of sufficient

throw to clear trim.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08710-6

b. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: 1) Steel Hinges: Steel pins. 2) Non-ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins. 3) Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins. 4) Interior Doors: Non-rising pins. 5) Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves. c. Quantity of Hinges: Provide quantity of hinges indicated but not fewer than 3

hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height.

3. Lock Cylinders and Keying a. All locks shall be furnished with removable core cylinders as manufactured by

Best Lock Corporation, Falcon Lock Co., or Arrow Lock Corp., and shall be a factory recorded continuation or extension of an existing keying previously furnished by these manufacturers for this institution.

1) Existing system where small quantities of cores are required: The

Institution shall specify the keyway required and uncombinated cores and key blanks needed. The combinating will be done by the Institution.

b. The Key Coding records shall be sent by Registered Mail to the Institution’s

Facility Maintenance Manager at the Completion of the Project. These records shall go directly from the Manufacturer to the Institution and shall not pass through the hands of the Hardware Distributor.

c. Cylinders shall be furnished complete with collars, construction cores, 7-pin

interchangeable cores, and two keys per cylinder. Cylinders shall be of correct type and length, fitted with correct cam or bar for operation of lock, and furnished with back plates and screws where required.

d. Construction cores shall be supplied to the General Contractor during the period

of construction. These construction cores shall be returned to the Manufacturer after the permanent master keyed cores are installed.

e. Cores are to be Grand Master Keyed, Master Keyed, Keyed alike in Groups,

and/or Keyed individually, as approved by the Institution. A Keying Schedule showing each door location, Manufacturer’s lock number, Manufacturer’s cylinder type number, finish, length, cam or bar type, and keying detail, shall be prepared by the Cylinder Manufacturer’s Representative for the Hardware Supplier, and submitted to the Institution for approval. The Cylinder Manufacturer’s Representative shall provide technical assistance and information to the Institution in establishing the keying system. Masterkeyed cores shall be installed by the General Contractor.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08710-7

f. Furnish six (6) Master Keys for each group. Furnish six (6) Grand Master Keys and one (1) Control Key, if a new Grand Master Key System is established. The above keys shall be included with the shipment of permanent cores.

g. Except where otherwise specified, locksets, exit devices, and cylinders must be

products of a single manufacturer. h. Cylinder Construction: Cylinders shall be manufactured from brass or bronze.

Maintain close tolerances to reduce excessive wear. Ball-end bottom tumbler pins coming in contact with key must be nickel silver; master and driver pins must be brass; driver springs must be stainless steel. Secure cam screws with a nylon patch to prevent loosening.

i. Keys: Paracentric and manufactured from nickel silver. 1) Key Quantity: Furnish four keys for each lock. All locks keyed alike. 2) Permanently inscribe each key and cylinder with a number that identifies

cylinder manufacturer's key symbol. Include notation DO NOT DUPLICATE.

3) Identify keys with tags and turnover directly to the Department. 4. Locks, Latches, and Bolts a. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt;

curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match hardware set. b. Lock Throw: 5/8" minimum throw of latch and deadbolt used on pairs of doors.

Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts at rated fire openings.

1) 1/2" minimum throw on other latch and deadlock bolts. c. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum 1/2" diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless

steel with minimum 12" long rod for doors up to 7'-0" high and longer rods, as required, for door heights exceeding 7'-0".

5. Closers and Door Control Devices a. Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated at doors required to be

accessible to the physically challenged, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 for door opening force and delayed action closing.

1) Include drop plates or mounting plates as required. b. Door Stops: Provide stops at doors that will strike walls or any other part of

construction. Where possible, use wall bumpers or dome-type stops. Use

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08710-8

overhead-type stops where other types are impractical or not acceptable to the Department.

6. Door Trim Units a. Fasteners: Countersunk screws for door trim units including kick plates, edge

trim, and similar units. b. Silencers: Rubber; 3 per single door except at weatherstripped doors and doors

with light seals. 7. Weatherstripping a. General: Except as indicated otherwise, provide continuous weatherstripping at

all edges of exterior door leafs. 1) Fasteners: Noncorrosive-type recommended by manufacturer for

application intended. 8. Thresholds a. General: Type, size, and profile as scheduled, extending full length of opening. 1) Fasteners: Flush, countersunk, noncorrosive; of types recommended by

manufacturer for applications intended. 9. Exit Devices a. General: The product of one manufacturer and listed under Panic Hardware in

the Accident Equipment List of Underwriters' Laboratories. In addition, where devices are required on labeled doors, devices must bear a UL label indicating Fire Exit Hardware.

1) Cylinder dogging not permitted. 10. Hardware Finishes a. General: Except where indicated otherwise, provide matching finishes for

hardware units at each door or opening to the greatest extent possible. Reduce differences in color and texture to degree commercially possible where base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or opening. In general, match items to manufacturer's standard finish for latch and lock sets (or push-pull units if no latch-lock sets) for color and texture.

b. Designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are

those listed in ANSI A156.18 Materials & Finishes Standard by BHMA, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08710-9

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION – GENERAL A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware

for Standard Steel Doors and Frames by the Door and Hardware Institute except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

B. Install each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces scheduled to be site-finished, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation with trade responsible for door finishing. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed. C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate

as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Set thresholds at exterior doors in full bed of butyl rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. 3.2 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware to ensure proper operation or function.

Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the specific application.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Final Adjustment: Where hardware installation is made more than one month prior to

acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the Work during the previous week and make final check and adjustment of hardware items in that space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

D. Instruct the Department in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware

finishes during the final adjustment of hardware. E. Furnish the Department with 2 of each special tool required to maintain or adjust hardware.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08710-10

HARDWARE SCHEDULE

HARDWARE SET #1 DOOR: X-101 1 CYLINDER HOUSING TYPE, TAIL PIECE/CAM AS REQUIRED SFIC-626 NOTE: REUSE EXISTING KEYED CORE NOTE: BALANCE OF HARDWARE FURNISHED WITH ALUMINUM DOORS

HARDWARE SET #2 DOOR: X-109A 3 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 TS2314-NRP-US26D 1 EXIT DEVICE 70-8813F x ETL-US32D 1 DOOR CLOSER CLP8501-689 1 KICK PLATE 8” x 34” x .050”-US32D 1 THRESHOLD 896V-PA-36” 1 WEATHER STRIP 160VA-36” x 86” 1 RAIN DRIP CAP 16A-40” NOTE: REUSE EXISTING KEYED CORE

HARDWARE SET #3 DOOR: X-120B, X-122 3 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 TA2314-NRP-US26D 1 EXIT DEVICE 70-8813 x ETL-US32D 1 DOOR CLOSER CLP8501T-689 1 KICK PLATE 8” x 34” x .050”-US32D 1 THRESHOLD 896V-PA-36” 1 WEATHER STRIP 160VA-36” x 86” 1 RAIN DRIP CAP 16A-40” NOTE: REUSE EXISTING KEYED CORE

HARDWARE SET #4 DOOR: X-126B 3 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 T4A3386-NRP-US26D 1 EXIT DEVICE 70-8813G x ETL-US32D 1 DOOR CLOSER CLP8501T-689 1 KICK PLATE 8” x 46” x .050”-US32D 1 THRESHOLD 896V-PA-48” 1 WEATHER STRIP 160VA-48” x 86”

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08710-11

1 RAIN DRIP CAP 16A-52” NOTE: REUSE EXISTING KEYED CORE

HARDWARE SET #5 DOOR: X-134B 3 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 T4A3386-NRP-US26D 1 EXIT DEVICE 70-8813J x ETL-US32D 1 DOOR CLOSER CLP8501T-689 1 KICK PLATE 8” x 38” x 050”-US32D 1 THRESHOLD 896V-PA-40” 1 WEATHER STRIP 160VA-40” x 86” 1 RAIN DRIP CAP 16A-44”

HARDWARE SET #6 DOOR: X-125, X-139A 6 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 TA2314-NRP-US26D 1 EXIT DEVICE 8710F-US32D 1 EXIT DEVICE 70-8713F x ETL-US32D 2 DOOR CLOSERS CLP8501T-689 2 KICK PLATES 8” x 33” x .050”-US32D 1 THRESHOLD 896V-PA-68” 1 WEATHER STRIP 160VA-68” x 86” 1 ASTRAGAL SET 140PA-86” 1 RAIN DRIP CAP 16A-72”

HARDWARE SET #7 DOOR: 115 3 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 TA2714-US26D 1 LOCKSET 70-8204-LNL-US26D 1 CORE 1C7_2_626 1 WALL STOP 406-US32D 3 SILENCERS 608

HARDWARE SET #8 DOOR: 103 2 CONTINUOUS HINGES A240HDC-85” 1 EXIT DEVICE 8710F-US32D 1 EXIT DEVICE 70-8713F x ETL-US32D 1 CORE 1C7_2_626 2 DOOR CLOSERS CLP8501-689 2 KICK PLATES 8” x 33” x .050”-US32D 2 SILENCERS 608 6 HINGE FILLER PLATES DFF4 x 12/24 SCREWS

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08710-12

HARDWARE SET #9 DOOR: 128A 3 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 x TA2714-US26D 1 EXIT DEVICE 12-70-8813F x ETL-US32D 1 DOOR CLOSER PR8501-689

1 KICK PLATE 8” x 34” x .050”-US32D 1 WALL STOP 406-US32D 1 SMOKE SEAL 5050C-17’ NOTE: REUSE EXISTING KEYED CORE

HARDWARE SET #10 DOOR: 104, 105A, 105B, 106, 107, 108, 111, 112, 113, 114A, 114B, 123A, 123B, 124, 140, 141 3 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 TA2714-US26D 1 LOCKSET 70-8205-LNL-US26D 1 WALL STOP 406-US32D 3 SILENCERS 608 NOTE: REUSE EXISTING KEYED CORE

HARDWARE SET #11 DOOR: 118B, 118D, 134C 3 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 TA2714-US26D 1 LOCKSET 70-8404-LNL-US26D 1 WALL STOP 406-US32D 3 SILENCERS 608 NOTE: REUSE EXISTING KEYED CORE

HARDWARE SET #12 DOOR: 121 3 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 TA2714-US26D 1 LOCKSET 70-8237-LNL-US26D 1 WALL STOP 406-US32D 3 SILENCERS 608 NOTE: REUSE EXISTING KEYED CORE

HARDWARE SET #13 DOOR: 109B 3 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 TA2714-US26D

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08710-13

1 LOCKSET 70-8237-LNL-US26D 1 DOOR CLOSER 8501-689-RA 1 KICK PLATE 8” x 34” x .050”-US32D 1 WALL STOP 406-US32D 3 SILENCERS 608 NOTE: REUSE EXISTING KEYED CORE

HARDWARE SET #14 DOOR: 126A 3 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 TA2714-US26D 1 LOCKSET 70-8237-LNL-US26D 1 DOOR CLOSER CLP8501-689 1 KICK PLATE 8” x 34” x .050”-US32D 3 SILENCERS 608 NOTE: REUSE EXISTING KEYED CORE

HARDWARE SET #15 DOOR: 128C 3 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 TA2714-US26D 1 EXIT DEVICE 12-70-8813F x ETL-US32D 1 DOOR CLOSRER PR8501-689 1 KICK PLATE 8” x 34” x .050”-US32D 1 WALL STOP 409-US32D 1 SMOKE SEAL 5050C-18’ NOTE: REUSE EXISTING KEYED CORE FROM CORRIDOR SIDE OF EXISTING DOOR NOTE: DOOR WILL NEED REPLACED TO MEET FIRE RATING REQUIREMENTS

HARDWARE SET #16 DOOR: 110, 129, 130, 131, 132, 133, M203, M204, M205, M206, M207 1 LOCKSET 7KC-2-7-AB-15-D-626 1 FULL LIP STRIKE US2010S2032D

HARDWARE SET #17 DOOR: 138 3 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 TA2714-US26D 1 PASSAGE SET 28-10U15-LL-US26D 1 FLOOR STOP 441-US26D 3 SILENCERS 608 NOTE: REUSE EXISTING CDX-09 LOCK

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08710-14

HARDWARE SET #18 DOOR: 137A, 137B 3 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 T4A3786-US26D 1 DEADLOCK 70-4877-US26D 1 COMBINATION PLATE 91-US32D 1 PULL PLATE BF110 x 70C-US32D 1 DOOR CLOSER 8501-689-RA 1 OVERHEAD HOLDER 9017-US32D 1 KICK PLATE 8” x 46” x .050”-US32D 3 SILENCERS 608 NOTE: REUSE EXISTING KEYED CORE

HARDWARE SET #19 DOOR: 120A 3 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 TA2714-US26D 1 DEADLOCK 70-4875-US26D 1 COMBINATION PLATE 91-US32D 1 PULL PLATE BF110 x 70C-US32D 1 DOOR CLOSER 8501-689-RA 1 OVERHEAD HOLDER 9014-US32D 1 KICK PLATE 8” x 34” x .050”-US32D 3 SILENCERS 608 NOTE: REUSE EXISTING CORE

HARDWARE SET #20 DOOR: 117, 135 3 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 TA2714-US26D 1 SURFACE DEADLOCK 112-LESS CYLINDER 1 RIM CYLINDER 12E-7-2-S2-RP-626-LESS CORE 1 COMBINATION PLATE 91-US32D 1 PULL PLATE BF110 x 70C-US32D 1 DOOR CLOSER 8501-689-RA 1 WALL STOP 406-US32D 3 SILENCERS 608 NOTE: REUSE EXISTING KEYED CORE

HARDWARE SET #21 DOOR: 116, 118A 3 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 TA2714-US26D 1 PUSH PLATE 70C-US32D 1 PULL PLATE BF110 x 70C-US32D 1 DOOR CLOSER 8501-689-RA 1 KICK PLATE 8” x 34” x .050”-US32D 1 WALL STOP 406-US32D 3 SILENCERS 608

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08710-15

HARDWARE SET #22 DOOR: 118C 3 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 TA2714-US26D 1 PUSH PLATE 70C-US32D 1 PULL PLATE BF110 x 70C-US32D 1 DOOR CLOSER 8501-689-RA 1 KICK PLATE 8” x 30” x .050”-US32D 1 WALL STOP 406-US32D 3 SILENCERS 608

HARDWARE SET #23 DOOR: M201A 6 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 TA2314-NRP-US26D 2 FLUSH BOLTS 555-12”-US26D 1 LOCKSET 70-8237-LNL-US26D 2 OVERHEAD HOLDERS 9013-US32D 1 THRESHOLD 513-PA-60” 2 SWEEPS 200NA-30” 1 WEATHER STRIP 160VA-60” x 86” 1 ASTRAGAL 139SP-86” 1 RAIN DRIP CAP 16A-64” NOTE: REUSE EXISTING KEYED CORE

HARDWARE SET #24 DOOR: M201B 2 EACH HINGES 4.5 x 4.5 TA2714-NRP-US26D 1 LOCKSET 70-8237-LNL-US26D 1 WEATHER STRIP 160VA-36” x 24” (4 SIDES) NOTE: REUSE EXISTING KEYED CORE NOTE: EXISTING DOOR NEEDS TO BE REPLACED

ALTERNATE HARDWARE OPTION DOOR: 109B 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE A240HDC-85” 1 EXIT DEVICE 70-8813F x ETL-US32D 1 DOOR CLOSER PR8501-689 1 KICK PLATE 8” x 34” x .050”-US32D 1 WALL STOP 406-US32D 3 SILENCERS 608 3 HINGE FILLER PLATES DFF4 x 12/24 SCREWS 1 STRIKE FILLER SFASA x 12/24 SCREWS NOTE: REUSE EXISTING KEYED CORE

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08710-16

HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS’ SPECIFIED EQUAL EQUAL HINGES McKINNEY HAGER IVES EXIT DEVICES SARGENT CORBIN RUSSWIN VON DUPRIN LOCKSETS SARGENT CORBIN RUSSWIN SCHLAGE DEADLOCKS DOOR CLOSER NORTON SARGENT LCN OVERHEAD HOLDERS ABH RIXSON GLYNN JOHNSON FLAT GOODS ROCKWOOD TRIMCO IVES THRESHOLDS NATIONAL GUARD PEMKO REESE WEATHER STRIP ASTRAGALS SWEEPS SMOKE SEAL SURFACE DEADLOCKS YALE SARGENT SCHLAGE CORES BEST NONE NONE END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08810 - 1

SECTION 08810 - GLASS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS A. The specifications sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and

“Division 1 – General Requirements” form a part of this section by this reference thereto, and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish labor, material, and equipment necessary to provide a complete installation of

site-glazed glass and glazing as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Joint sealers are specified in Section 07900 - JOINT SEALERS. 2. Steel frames are specified in Section 08110 – STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES. 3. Aluminum doors and frames are specified in Section 08120 - ALUMINUM

DOORS AND FRAMES. 1.2 RERERENCES A. The publications referenced below establish minimum requirements for materials, systems and execution which may be specified in this Section.


ANSI Z97.1 Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE) ASCE 7-05 (2006; Errata 2007) Minimum Design Loads for

Buildings and Other Structures


ASTM C 509 Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material

ASTM C 864 Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers

ASTM C 920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM C 1036 Flat Glass

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08810 - 2

ASTM C 1048 Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass

ASTM C 1172 Laminated Architectural Flat Glass ASTM D 395 Rubber Property - Compression Set ASTM E 773 Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating

Glass Units ASTM E 774 Classification of the Durability of Sealed

Insulating Glass Units ASTM 1184 Standard Specification for Structural Silicone

Sealants ASTM E 1300 Determining Load Resistance of Glass in

Buildings ASTM 1642 Standard Test Method for Glazing and Glazing

Systems Subject to Airblast Loadings ASTM 2248 Standard Practice for Specifying an Equivalent

3-Second Duration Design Loading for Blast Resistant Glazing Fabricated with Laminated Glass

CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)

16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials

GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA (GANA)

GANA Glazing Manual Glazing Manual GANA Sealant Manual Sealant Manual GANA Standards Manual Tempering Division's Engineering Standards

Manual INSULATING GLASS MANUFACTURERS ALLIANCE (IGMA) IGMA TB-3001 Guidelines for Sloped Glazing IGMA TM-3000 Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass

Units IGMA TR-1200 Commercial Insulating Glass Dimensional

Tolerance NATIONAL FENESTRATION RATING COUNCIL (NFRC) NFRC 100 Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product

U-Factors NFRC 200 Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product

Solar Heat Gain, Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08810 - 3

NFPA 252 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies NFPA 257 Fire Tests for Window and Glass Block

Assemblies

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's technical data for each glazing material and fabricated

glass product required including installation and maintenance instructions. B. Samples 1. Submit 12 inch square samples of each type of glass specified except for clear

single pane units. C. Certificates 1. Submit certificates from respective manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing

materials furnished for Project comply with specified requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility 1. To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, provide materials produced by a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind of glass indicated. B. Glazing Standards 1. Comply with FGMA Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual. C. Safety Glazing Standard 1. Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. a. Provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of

Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Provide safety glass at all locations in compliance with Section 2406

Safety Glazing of the International Building Code 2009. D. Fire Resistance Rated Wire Glass

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08810 - 4

1. Provide wire glass products that are identical to those tested per ASTM E 163 (UL 9) and are labeled and listed by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Insulating Glass Certification Program 1. Provide insulating glass units permanently marked either on spacers or at least

one component pane of units with certification label of Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC).

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate

temperature conditions are beyond limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or when joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 40 degrees F. 1.6 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY A. Insulating Glass: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer of insulating glass

agreeing to furnish f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below, replacements for those insulating glass units developing manufacturing defects defined as failure of hermetic seal of air space (beyond that due to glass breakage) as evidenced by intrusion of dirt or moisture, internal condensation or fogging, deterioration of protected internal glass coatings, if any, and other visual indications of seal failure or performance; provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have been complied with during warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10 years following date of

glass manufacture. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with applicable provisions of Section 01620. B. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage, and handling to comply

with manufacturer's directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, and from other causes.

C. Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, avoid hermetic seal ruptures by complying with insulating glass fabricator's recommendations for venting and sealing.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08810 - 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Manufacturers A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide glass and glazing products of one of

the following: 1. Clear and Tinted Float Glass AFG Industries, Inc. Ford Glass Division PPG Industries, Inc. or equal as approved by the Professional 2. Wire Glass AFG Industries, Inc. Hordis Brothers, Inc. Pilkington Sales (North America) Limited or equal as approved by the Professional 3. Heat-Treated Glass AFG Industries, Inc. Ford Glass Division PPG Industries, Inc. or equal as approved by the Professional 4. Insulating Glass AFG Industries, Inc. Ford Glass Division PPG Industries, Inc. or equal as approved by the Professional 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS - GENERAL A. Primary Glass Standard: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 1036. B. Heat-Treated Glass Standard: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 1048. C. Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge

clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer. Provide thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by glass manufacturer for application intended.

2.3 PRIMARY GLASS PRODUCTS

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08810 - 6

A. Clear Float Glass: Type I, Class I, Quality q3. B. Wire Glass: Type II, Class I, Quality q8; complying with ANSI Z97.1; 1/4 inch thick; Form I; Mesh m2 (square). 2.4 HEAT-TREATED GLASS PRODUCTS A. Manufacturing Process: Manufacture heat-treated glass horizontal (roller hearth) process. B. Uncoated Clear Heat-Treated Float Glass: Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, kind as indicated below. 1. Kind HS (heat strengthened) where required for structural performance or thermal stress. 2. Kind FT (fully tempered) where required by referenced code. 2.6 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Sealant: 2-part polysulfide glazing sealant; ASTM C 290, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. B. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape: AAMA 804.1, with or without continuous spacer rod as recommended by manufacturers of tape and glass for application intended. C. Gaskets: Dense elastomeric compression seal gaskets; ASTM C 864, extruded or molded neoprene, EPDM, or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. D. Cellular Elastomeric Preformed Gaskets: ASTM C 509, Type II, black; extruded or molded neoprene. E. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Type recommended by manufacturer of sealants/gaskets. F. Blocks and Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM, or silicone as required for compatibility with glazing sealants; 80 to 90 Shore A hardness for setting blocks; for spacers and edge blocks, of hardness recommended by glass and sealant manufacturer for application intended. G. Compressible Filler Rods: Closed-cell or waterproof-jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam; 5-10 psi compression strength for 25 percent compression. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL GLAZING REQUIREMENTS

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 08810 - 7

A. To achieve airtight and watertight performance and to minimize breakage, comply with Reference Standards and instructions of glass, glazing sealants, and gaskets manufacturers. B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. Inspect glass during installation and discard pieces with edge damage that may affect glass performance. C. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. D. Setting: Set glass units larger than 6 square feet or thicker than 1/8 inch on two identical setting blocks of 85+5 durometer hardness. Center blocks at bottom quarter points. On smaller glass units, position setting blocks equidistant from centerline of glass unit. 1. Size of Setting Blocks: 1 inch long for each square foot of glass unit but not less than 4 inches long. Cut setting blocks 1/16 inch less than full channel width. Use blocks of sufficient height to provide recommended nominal bite and minimum edge clearance for glass. E. Centering: Center glass units in opening both vertically and horizontally. For large units in dry glazing system, provide edge cushion at each vertical jamb to prevent lateral walking. Install bumpers of full channel width and 65+5 durometer hardness neoprene. Position minimum 3 inch long bumpers in vertical channels; allow nominal 1/8 inch clearance between edge of glass and bumpers. F. Shimming: Install shims as recommended by glass manufacturer. Use continuous neoprene gasket or spacer; face shims not permitted. G. Sealant: Install sealant watershed; limit to approximate height of 1/16 inch beyond sightline of glass framing members. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations; remove contaminating substances by method approved by glass manufacturer. B. Wash both faces of glass not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for Final Inspection. Wash glass using methods and materials recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Protect glass installations from damage or deterioration until final acceptance. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09220 - 1

SECTION 09220 – CEMENT PLASTER STUCCO PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS A. The specification sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and


1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary to provide cement plaster stucco

patching and replacement as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Clean and resurface existing stucco with a sand-textured exterior coating. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced below establish minimum requirements for materials, systems and


AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)

524R Guide to Portland Cementer Plastering PORTLAND CEMENT ASSOCIATION

Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) Manual


ASTM A A526 Steel Sheet, Hot-Dip Galvanized, Commercial Quality ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C 754 Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing

Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products

ASTM C 847 Standard Specification for Metal Lath ASTM C 897 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job Mixed

Portland Cement Based Plasters ASTM C 920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM C 926 Standard Specification for Application of Portland

Cement Based Plaster ASTM C 933 Standard Specification for Welded Wire Lath

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09220 - 2

ASTM C 1007 Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and axial) Steed Studs and Related Accessories

ASTM C 1032 Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base ASTM C 1063 Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and

Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster

ASTM C 1328 Standard Specification for Plastic (Stucco) Cement ASTM D 226 Standard Specification for Asphalt Saturated Organic

Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing ASTM D 1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

ICC-ES

AC11 Cementitious Exterior Wall Coatings

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s product literature and installation instructions for each product

specified. B. Samples: 1. Provide finish samples indicating color and texture for approval by Professional. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain cement plaster stucco products, joint treatment materials,

and related accessory components from a single manufacturer. B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the


1.6 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Structural (wind and axial loads) 1. Design for maximum allowable deflection, normal to the plan of the wall of L/360. 2. Design for wind load in conformance with code requirements, using framing members

designed to comply with the standards, strength, and stiffness requirements of the applicable code.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09220 - 3

3. Maximum stud spacing: 16 inches on center. 4. Sheathing: Minimum ½ inch glass mat faced gypsum sheathing with a water-resistant

core in compliance with ASTM C 1177. 5. Drainage mat: Maximum ¼ inch thick tangled filament nylon core with fabric facing. 6. Screw fasteners for cement board: Steel framing – minimum #8 Type S-12 corrosion

resistant screws with minimum 0.395 inch wafer head diameter and minimum 3/8 inch and three thread penetration into framing.

7. Cement board fastener spacing: Maximum 8 inches vertically along studs. 8. Metal framing capable of achieving +159 psf, -81 psf: Minimum 18 gage or heavier,

minimum 3 5/8 inch depth and 1 5/8 inch flange width, cold formed C-shaped steel stud framing spaced 16 inches on center maximum.

B. Moisture Control - Prevent the accumulation of water into or behind the cement board stucco

either by condensation or leakage into the wall construction, in the design and detailing of the wall assembly.

1. Provide corrosion resistant flashing to protect exposed elements and to direct water to

the exterior including at soffit/wall intersections, above projecting features, and at the base of the wall.

2. Air Leakage Prevention – Prevent excess air leakage in the design and detailing of the

assembly. 3. Vapor Diffusion and Condensation – Provide air and moisture barrier and drain screen

over sheathing. 4. Seal cement board stucco accessory butt joints with appropriate sealant. Seal all cement

board stucco terminations and penetrations through the cement board wall assembly with appropriate sealant, or backer rod and sealant, as dictated by joint type.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Application of wet materials shall not take place during inclement weather unless appropriate

protection is provided. Protect materials from inclement weather until they are dry. B. Stucco base shall not be applied when soffit, wall or ambient temperatures are below 40° F. C. At the time of stucco product application, the air and wall surface temperatures shall be from

40° F minimum to 100° F maximum. D. These temperatures shall be maintained with adequate air ventilation and circulation for a

minimum of 24 hours thereafter, or until the products are completely dry. Refer to published product data sheets for more specific information.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09220 - 4

E. CCP Base shall be completely dry and properly cured for a minimum of 7 days prior to primer

application. F. If necessary, tenting, heating and ventilation may be utilized to maintain required conditions.

Heaters shall be vented to the outside. G. Protect Commercial Cement Plaster materials from uneven and excessive evaporation in dry,

warm, or windy weather. Always work the shady side of the wall. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All Commercial Cement Plaster materials shall be delivered to the job site in the original,

unopened packages with labels intact. Questionable materials shall not be used. B. Materials shall be stored at the job site, and at all times, in a cool, dry location, out of direct

sunlight, protected from weather and other sources of damage. C. Protect all products from weather and direct sunlight. D. Maximum storage temperature shall not exceed 100° F. Minimize exposure of materials to

temperatures over 90° F. Finishes exposed to temperatures over 110° F for even short periods may exhibit skinning, increased viscosity and should be inspected prior to use.

1.9 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY A. Submit cement plaster stucco system labor and materials warranty signed by authorized

representative of both systems manufacturer and installer. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years following the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Cement Plaster Stucco and related accessory

components as manufactured by one of the following: Dryvit Sto Corporation Senergy BASF Wall Systems or equal as approved by the Professional 2.2 MATERIALS

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09220 - 5

A. Framing components for soffits and canopies 1. General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 645 for materials and sizes

unless indicated otherwise. 2. Metal framing capable of achieving +159 psf, -81 psf: Minimum 18 gage or heavier,

minimum 3 5/8 inch depth and 1 5/8 inch flange width, cold formed C-shaped steel stud framing spaced 16 inches on center maximum.

3. Metal framing surface treatment to be hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A525, Grade G-60. B. Gypsum Board 1. Provide exterior grade glass mat faced gypsum sheathing with a water-resistant core in

maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end joints. 2. Thickness: Minimum 1/2 inch thickness, complying with ASTM C 1325 for application

system and support spacing indicated. C. Air/Moisture Barrier: Fluid applied air/moisture barrier for sheathing. D. Lath: Self-furring diamond mesh metal lath shall be galvanized, minimum 2.5 lbs/sq yd and

comply with ASTM C 847. E. Plaster Base Coat: Fiberglass reinforced, cement plaster mix utilizing alkali resistant fibers

and cementitious admixtures. F. Primer: Water-based, pigmented acrylic primer applied over the cured base coat. G. Stucco Coating: Exterior wall coating enhanced with mildew resistance. Minimum two coats. H. Finish Coat: 100% acrylic finishes with integral color and texture. Match existing finish

texture. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Starter Track – Starter Track Drip Edge, rigid PVC plastic tracks with weepholes for use at

terminations such as base of wall. B. Control Joint: “V” Control Joint, rigid PVC plastic single piece control joint for use at

intervals in the field of the wall, and at corners of penetrations.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09220 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. For compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of cement plaster stucco construction, examine substrates to which stucco construction attaches or abuts. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING A. General: Install steel framing in compliance with applicable ASTM C 754 and ASTM C 840 requirements. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in the work to comply

with details indicated, recommendations of cement plaster stucco manufacturer, and applicable Reference Standards.

C. At the following locations, isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of

loads imposed by structural movement: 1. Where edges of suspended soffits abut building structure horizontally at soffit perimeters

or at penetration of structural elements. 2. Where walls abut overhead structure. D. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members;

independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members. E. At exterior framing, fasten studs on both flanges at top and bottom tracks. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Existing stucco shall be made sound by removing all loose, peeling and/or chalking finishes by

sanding. B. Clean existing stucco with a household detergent, or detergent recommended by stucco

manufacturer. Flush wall thoroughly with clean water. C. Remove surface contaminants and replace damaged sheathing. D. All sheathing must be handled and installed in compliance with applicable building code and

manufacturer requirements. Installed sheathing must be clean, dry and free from damage, frost, and all bond-inhibiting materials. Abut gypsum sheathing joints.

E. Spot surface defects in sheathing with joint treatment.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09220 - 7

F. The surfaces to receive plaster must be free of dust, loose particles, oil and other contaminants

that would affect the adhesion, installation or performance of the cement plaster stucco. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Comply with system manufacturer’s written instructions for installation of system. B. Apply metal lath tightly and properly fastened. C. Apply trim accessories at perimeter of system, at expansion joints and elsewhere, as indicated.

Use drip screed at bottom edge of system, unless otherwise indicated. D. Apply base coats and primer per manufacturer’s written instructions. Feather seams and edges.

Feather base coat into existing adjacent stucco. Double wrap all inside and outside corners with a minimum 8 inch overlap in each direction. Allow base coat to thoroughly dry before applying primer or finish

E. Apply finish to the dry primed base coat and to the existing adjacent stucco surface. 1. Apply finish in a continuous application, and work a wet edge towards the unfinished

wall area. Work to an architectural break in the wall before stopping to avoid cold joints.

2. Do not install in separate batches of finish side-by-side. 3. Do not apply finish into or over sealant joints. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Provide protection of installed materials from water infiltration into or behind them. B. Provide protection of installed materials from dust, dirt, precipitation, and freezing. C. Provide protection of installed primer and finish from dust, dirt precipitation, freezing and

continuous high humidity until fully dry. D. Provide sealant and backer material at cement board stucco terminations and at fixture

penetrations through the cement board stucco to protect against air, water and insect infiltration. Provide weeps at intersections of vertical and horizontal faces to direct water to the exterior.

E. Institute appropriate measures to ensure that cement plaster stucco is without damage or

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09260 - 1

SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS A. The specification sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and


1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary to provide gypsum board applications as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced below establish minimum requirements for materials, systems and



ANSI A108.11 Interior Installation of Cementitious Backup Units ANSI A118.9 Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious

Backer Units


ASTM A 580/A 580M Stainless Steel Wire ASTM A 853 Steel Wire, Carbon, for General Use ASTM B 164 Nickel-Copper Alloy Rod, Bar, and Wire ASTM C 36/C 36M Gypsum Wallboard ASTM C 475 Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum

Board ASTM C 557 Adhesive for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood

Framing ASTM C 630/C 630M Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board ASTM C 645 Nonstructural Steel Framing Members ASTM C 754 Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive

Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products ASTM C 840 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board ASTM C 931/C 931M Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board ASTM C 955 Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,

Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09260 - 2

ASTM C 1002 Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases

ASTM C 1047 Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base

ASTM C 1177/C 1177M Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing ASTM C 1178/C 1178M Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel

GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA)

GA 214 Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish GA 216 Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board GA 600 Fire Resistance Design Manual

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

UL Fire Resist Directory Fire Resistance Directory (2 Vol.)

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s product literature and installation instructions for each product

specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain gypsum board products, joint treatment materials, and

related accessory components from a single manufacturer. B. Reference Standards: 1. United States Gypsum Company publication Gypsum Construction Handbook, as

amended to date. 2. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms

for gypsum board construction not otherwise defined herein. C. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the


1.6 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to

published assemblies having fire resistance ratings determined in accordance with ASTM E 119.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09260 - 3

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions during application and finishing of

gypsum board systems; comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Minimum Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing,

maintain not less than 40 degrees F. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 degrees F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete.

C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials.

Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials from drying too rapidly. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and

identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep dry and protected against damage from weather,

direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging.

C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or

otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide gypsum board and related accessory

components as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring Dietrich Metal Framing Marino Ware United States Gypsum Co. or equal as approved by the Professional 2. Grid Suspension Systems Chicago Metallic Corp. National Rolling Mills Co. United States Gypsum Co. or equal as approved by the Professional

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09260 - 4

3. Gypsum Board and Related Products Georgia-Pacific Corp. National Gypsum Company United States Gypsum Co. or equal as approved by the Professional 2.2 FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. General: Provide components complying with ASTM C 754 for materials and sizes unless

indicated otherwise. B. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. C. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. D. Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 0.0598 inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16 inch wide flanges, protected with rust-inhibitive paint. 1. Carrying Channels: 1 1/2 inch deep, 475 pounds per 1000 feet. 2. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep, 300 pounds per 1000 feet. E. Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat-shaped, 7/8 inch deep, 0.0179 inch (25 gage) thick. F. Grid Suspension System: (AT CONTRACTOR'S OPTION) ASTM C 645, manufacturer's

standard grid suspension system consisting of main beams and cross furring members which interlock to form a modular supporting network.

2.4 GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize

end-to-end joints. 1. Thickness: 1/2 or 5/8 inch thickness as indicated on Drawings, complying with ASTM C

840 for application system and support spacing indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36: 1. Type: Regular, moisture-resistant (W/R), or Type X for fire-resistance-rated assemblies. 2. Edges: Tapered. 2.6 ACCESSORIES

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09260 - 5

A. Cornerbead, Edge Trim, and Control Joints: Formed aluminum or sheet steel coated with zinc

by hot-dip or electrolytic process, complying with ASTM C 1047. B. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat-shaped, 0.0179 inch (25 gage) thick, 7/8 inch

deep. C. Z-Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, Z-shaped, 0.0179 inch (25 gage) thick, depth as indicated

on Drawings. 2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475, ASTM C 840, and recommendations of manufacturer of

gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated. B. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless indicated otherwise. 1. Pressure-sensitive or staple-attached open-weave glass fiber reinforcing tape; type

recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application intended.

C. Drying-Type Joint Compounds: Factory prepackaged, vinyl-based products complying with

the following requirements for formulation and intended use: 1. Ready-Mix Formulation: Factory premixed product. 2. All-Purpose Compound: Formulated for use as both taping and topping compound. D. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Tile Backer Panel Application): ANSI A118.4. 1. Prepackaged dry mortar mix composed of portland cement, graded aggregate, and

manufacturer's standard dry polymer additive in form of reemulsifiable powder to which only water is added at job site.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction complying with Reference Standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. B. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and

other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; comply with recommendations of gypsum wallboard systems manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C 1002. D. Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, nonbleeding, gunnable sealant.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09260 - 6

E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral fiber blanket insulation produced by combining

mineral fibers manufactured from glass or slag with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets with membrane facing).

F. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound of type recommended for spot

grouting hollow metal door frames. G. Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for laminating gypsum boards to steel

framing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. For compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of drywall construction, examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING A. General: Install steel framing in compliance with applicable ASTM C 754 and ASTM C 840 requirements. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in the work to comply

with details indicated, recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, and applicable Reference Standards.

C. At the following locations, isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of

loads imposed by structural movement: 1. Where edges of suspended ceilings abut building structure horizontally at ceiling

perimeters or at penetration of structural elements. 2. Where partitions and wall framing abut overhead structure. D. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members;

independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members. E. At exterior framing, fasten studs on both flanges at top and bottom tracks. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09260 - 7

1. Do not attach hangers to roof deck. B. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduits. C. Keep hangers and braces 2 inches clear of ducts, pipes, and conduits. D. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than

that required by referenced steel framing installation standards. 1. Wire Hangers: 0.1620 inch diameter (8 gage), 4 feet on centers. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 1 1/2 inch, 4 feet on centers. 3. Rigid Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches on centers. F. Optional Framing System: Metal studs with maximum spacing of 16 inches on centers. G. Installation Tolerances 1. Cross Furring Members: Level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. H. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated. 3.4 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated; extend blankets above ceilings to floor or

roof deck above. C. Methods of Gypsum Board Application 1. Single-Layer Application a. Apply gypsum board ceilings prior to wall/partition application. b. At partitions/walls, apply gypsum board vertically (parallel with framing) unless

indicated otherwise; use maximum length sheets to minimize end joints. c. At partitions/walls 8'-1" or less in height, apply gypsum board horizontally

(perpendicular to framing); use maximum length sheets to minimize end joints. d. Single-Layer Fastening: Fasten with screws. D. Locate exposed end-butt joints as far as possible from center of walls and ceilings; stagger not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09260 - 8

E. Install ceiling boards across framing; layout boards to minimize number of end-butt joints.

Stagger end joints at least 24 inches. F. Layout and install wall/partition boards to avoid end-butt joints. At high walls, install boards

horizontally with end joints staggered over studs. G. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp

boards. Butt boards together for light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch open space between boards. Do not force into place.

H. Except at horizontal applications or where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-

blocking is provided behind end joints, locate either edge or end joints over supports. Position boards with edges of identical configuration abutting (tapered to tapered, mill-cut to mill-cut, and field-cut to field-cut). Do not place tapered edges against field-cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.

I. Fasten gypsum board to steel studs with leading edge or end of each board attached to open

(unsupported) edge of stud flange first. J. Fasten gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking for additional support at

openings and cutouts. K. At doors over 32 inches wide, apply spot grout at each metal frame jamb anchor clip before

inserting board into frame. L. Form control and expansion joints where required to comply with reference standards; leave

gap between edges of boards and prepare location to receive trim accessories. M. Sheath both faces partition framing with gypsum board at concealed spaces (above ceilings, for

example) except at properly braced chase walls. 1. Except where concealed application is required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,

coverage may be accomplished using scraps of not less than 8 square feet in area; coverage may be limited to not less than 75 percent of full coverage.

2. Fit gypsum board around ducts, pipes, and conduits. N. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4 inch to

1/2 inch space and trim edges with U bead. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. O. Where sound-rated construction is indicated, seal partition perimeters, control and expansion

joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim. Close off sound-flanking paths around or through construction; seal partitions above acoustical ceilings.

P. Space gypsum board fasteners in accordance with Reference Standards and gypsum board

manufacturer's recommendations.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09260 - 9

3.5 INSTALLATION OF TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: Where possible, use same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to

fasten gypsum board to supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with trim manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Install corner beads at external corners. C. Except where plastic trim is indicated, install metal edge trim where edge of gypsum board

would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed. Except where U bead (semi-finishing type) is indicated, furnish trim with flange designed to receive joint compound.

1. Install LC bead where gypsum board is tightly abutted to other construction and back

flange may be attached to framing or supporting substrate. 2. Install U type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant-filled (including

expansion joints). 3. Install plastic edge trim where indicated at juncture of wall panels and ceilings. 4. Install control joints at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at spacings and locations

required by referenced gypsum board application and finish standard and approved by the Department for visual effect.

3.6 FINISHING OF GYPSM BOARD A. General: Gypsum board shall be finished in accordance with ASTM C 840, GA 214 and GA

216. Plenum areas above ceilings shall be finished to Level 1 in accordance with GA 214. Water resistant gypsum backing board, ASTM C 630/C 630M, to receive ceramic tile shall be finished to Level 2 in accordance with GA 214. Walls and ceilings to receive a heavy-grade wall covering or heave textured finish before painting shall be finished to Level 3 in accordance with GA 214. Walls and ceilings without critical lighting to receive flat paints, light textures, or wall coverings shall be finished to Level 4 in accordance with GA 214. Unless otherwise specified, all gypsum board walls, partitions and ceilings shall be finished to Level 5 in accordance with GA 214.

B. Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints, flanges of corner beads, edge trim, control joints,

penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration.

C. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using setting-type joint compound. D. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards except where trim accessories are indicated. E. Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the following joint compounds in 3 coats (not

including prefill); sand between coats and after final coat. 1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or taping compound.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09260 - 10

2. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound. 3. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mix drying-type all-purpose or topping compound. F. Partial Finishing: Omit third coat and sanding at concealed drywall work scheduled for

finishing, at locations requiring finishing to achieve fire-resistance rating or sound rating, and at locations serving as air or smoke barriers.

G. Seal perimeter of sound insulated partitions with acoustical sealant. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that gypsum drywall construction is

without damage or deterioration at time of final inspection or acceptance. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09300 - 1

SECTION 09300 - TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS A. The specification sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and


1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary to provide a complete installation of ceramic tile as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Monolithic slab finishes for tile substrates are specified in Section 03300 - CAST-IN-

PLACE CONCRETE. 2. Joint sealers are specified in Section 07900 - JOINT SEALERS. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced below establish minimum requirements for materials, systems and execution which may be specified in this Section.


ANSI A108.1A Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar

ANSI A108.1B Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar

ANSI A108.4 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive

ANSI A108.5 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex- Portland Cement Mortar

ANSI A108.6 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy

ANSI A108.8 Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Mortar and Grout

ANSI A108.10 Installation of Grout in Tilework ANSI A118.1 Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar ANSI A118.2 Conductive Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar ANSI A118.3 Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy

and Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09300 - 2

ANSI A118.4 Latex-Portland Cement Mortar ANSI A118.5 Chemical Resistant Furan Mortars and Grouts for Tile ANSI A118.6 Ceramic Tile Grouts ANSI A118.9 Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units ANSI A136.1 Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile ANSI A137.1 Ceramic Tile


ASTM A 185 Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM C 33 Concrete Aggregates ASTM C 144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar ASTM C 150 Portland Cement ASTM C 206 Finishing Hydrated Lime ASTM C 207 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes ASTM C 241 Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic ASTM C 373 Water Absorption, Bulk Density, Apparent Porosity, and Apparent

Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware Products ASTM C 482 Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement ASTM C 501 Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber

Abraser ASTM C 648 Breaking Strength of Ceramic Tile ASTM C 847 Metal Lath ASTM C 1026 Measuring the Resistance of Ceramic Tile to Freeze-Thaw Cycling ASTM C 1027 Determining Visible Abrasion Resistance of Glazed Ceramic Tile ASTM C 1028 Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other

Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method

ASTM C 1178/C 1178M Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel

MARBLE INSTITUTE OF AMERICA (MIA)

MIA Design Manual Design Manual IV Dimensional Stone


NFPA 99 Health Care Facilities

TILE COUNCIL OF AMERICA (TCA)

TCA Handbook Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation


FED-STD 795 (Basic) Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS)

U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)

36 CFR 1191 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09300 - 3

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s product data for each type of product specified. B. Samples: 1. Submit samples of each type, class, and color of ceramic tile indicated (not fewer than 4

tiles of size specified). Mount tiles on minimum 24 inch square plywood or hardboard backing, grouted as specified.

2. Submit samples of grout and accessory items. 3. Submit 4 inch long sample of marble saddle. C. Submit detailed material list and description of installation method to be used for each type of

tile application. D. Material Certificates: 1. Submit master grade certificates (signed by tile manufacturer and installer) for each

shipment, type, and composition of tile. a. Each cement product required for mortar and grout. Include name of

manufacturer, brand, type, and weight. b. Each type and size of joint reinforcement. c. Each type and size of anchors, ties, and metal accessories. E. Steel Products Procurement Act Certification:

1. Submit certification for steel products used in the Project pursuant with the provisions of the Steel Products Procurement Act (ACT of 1978, March 3, P.L. 6, No. 3 1-7) (73. P.S. 1881-87) which, in part, requires that if any steel products are to be used or supplied in the performance of a contract, only steel products, as defined by the ACT, that are made in the United States may be used.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and

variety of tile from a single source having resources to provide products of consistent quality, appearance, and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.

B. Single-Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of

uniform quality from one manufacturer. C. Reference Standards:

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09300 - 4

1. Comply with the following American National Standards Institute (ANSI) requirements: a. Standard Specification for Ceramic Tile, ANSI A 137.1 as amended to date. b. Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar, ANSI A108.5 as amended to date. c. Standard Specification for Installation of Grout in Ceramic Tile Installations,

ANSI A108.10 as amended to date. d. Latex Portland Cement Mortar, ANSI A118.4 as amended to date. e. Standard Specification for Ceramic Tile Grouts, ANSI A118.6 as amended to

date. 2. Comply with recommendations of the Tile Council of America (TCA) as outlined in

Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, as amended to date. D. Installer Qualifications: Engage installer having minimum 5 years experience on tile

installations similar to this Project in material, design, and extent. E. Sample Panels: Before commencing installation of tile, erect field-built sample panels to

demonstrate qualities of materials and workmanship. 1. Locate sample panels as directed by the Department. 2. Construct the following: a. One 2 feet by 2 feet sample panel of ceramic wall tile. b. One 2 feet by 2 feet sample of mosaic floor tile. 3. Construct sample panels on substrates indicated using materials and methods specified. 4. Panels will be used to demonstrate aesthetic effect and quality of workmanship. 5. Obtain approval of sample panels prior to commencing tile installation. 6. As a standard for judging completed tile work, retain and maintain sample panels until

Substantial Completion. 7. Following Substantial Completion Inspection, demolish and remove sample panels and

related debris. F. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the


D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09300 - 5

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels

intact until time of use. Comply with requirements of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.

B. Store and handle tile materials to prevent damage or contamination. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply

with Reference Standards and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide

buildup. C. Maintain temperatures at 50 degrees F or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7

days after completion unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standards or manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: Dal Tile American Olean Crossville or equal as approved by the Professional 2.2 PRODUCTS A. The following products are used to establish a standard of size and color to match existing: 1. Porcelain Tile (Floor)

Dal Tile Keystone Mosaics including cove base and 6” high wall base: 1” x 1” Buffstone Range D147.

2. Porcelain Tile (Walls) Dal Tile Semi-Gloss 4 ¼” x 4 ¼”: Luminary Gold D142 3. Waterproof Membrane

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09300 - 6

Laticrete International, Inc. Mapei Corp. Summitville Tiles, Inc. or equal as approved by the Professional 4. Mortars and Grouts Laticrete International, Inc. Mapei Corp. Summitville Tiles, Inc. or equal as approved by the Professional 2.2 PRODUCTS - GENERAL A. Standards for Ceramic Tile 1. ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and grades. a. Furnish tile complying with Standard Grade requirements unless indicated

otherwise. 2. ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) for minimum coefficient of friction values. a. Furnish floor tiles having traffic (wearing) surfaces meeting or exceeding 0.6

coefficient of friction when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1028. B. Standard for Tile Installation Materials: ANSI standard referenced with specific products and

materials specified herein. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile,

grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following:

1. Match color, texture, and pattern indicated by reference to manufacturer's standard

designations for these characteristics. 2. Provide selections made by the Design Professional from manufacturer's standard range

of colors, textures, and patterns. 3. Provide tile trim and accessories to match color and finish of adjoining flat tile. D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected from sample

submittals, blend tile in factory to match approved samples and package to provide even distribution of color range from container to container.

E. Mounting: Where factory-mounted tile is required, provide back-mounted or edge-mounted

assemblies standard with manufacturer unless specified otherwise.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09300 - 7

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Porcelain Tile (Floor) 1. Face Dimensions: 1 inch by 1 inch mosaic 2. Nominal Thickness: 1/4 inch. 3. Face: Plain. 4. Edges: Square. 5. Color: One field color to match existing 6. Shapes: Cove base, conventional bullnose and external corner cove, conventional fillet

and internal corner cove. B. Porcelain Wall Tile 1. Face Dimensions: 4 1/4 inches by 4 1/4 inches mosaic 2. Nominal Thickness: 1/4 inch. 3. Face: Plain. 4. Edges: Square. 5. Color: One field color to match existing 6. Shapes: Conventional bullnose at external corners, field-butted square at internal corners. 2.4 STONE SADDLES A. General: Provide stone that is uniform in color and finish, fabricated to sizes and profiles

indicated or required for transition between floor tile surface and adjoining finished floor. B. Marble Saddles: White, honed marble complying with MIA Group A requirements for

soundness, complying with ASTM C 503 for abrasion resistance; minimum hardness of 10 per ASTM C 241.

2.5 SETTING MATERIALS A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4; prepackaged dry mortar mix composed of

portland cement, graded aggregate, and manufacturer's standard dry polymer additive in form of reemulsifiable powder to which only water is added at job site.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09300 - 8

B. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion additive serving as replacement for

part or all of gauging water, combined at job site with prepackaged dry mortar mix supplied or specified by latex additive manufacturer.

C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. D. Sand: ASTM C 144. 2.6 GROUTING MATERIALS A. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6; prepackaged dry grout mix composed of

portland cement, graded aggregate, colorfast pigments, and manufacturer's standard dry polymer additive in form of reemulsifiable powder to which only water is added at job site.

B. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3; two-part epoxy grout employing resin and hardener. C. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion additive serving as replacement for

part or all of gauging water, combined at job site with prepackaged dry mortar mix supplied or specified by latex additive manufacturer.

D. Epoxy Additive: ANSI A118.3; two-part epoxy additive employing resin and hardener. E. Grout Colors: As selected by the Professional from manufacturer’s standard range. 2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Waterproof Membrane: Liquid rubber cold-applied over reinforcing fabric. 1. 9235 Waterproof Membrane. B. Reinforcing: Welded wire fabric conforming to ASTM A 185, 2" x 2", W16 x W16 wire.

Provide flat sheets or flatten before installation. 2.8 SEALANTS A. General: Provide chemically curing elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated; comply

with applicable provisions of Section 07900 - JOINT SEALERS and ASTM C 920. B. Multipart Pourable Urethane Sealant 1. Type M, Grade P, Class 25, uses T and M. 2. Color: Match colors of grout unless indicated otherwise.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09300 - 9

C. Joint Backer: Flexible, compressible, closed-cell foam polyethylene or open cell or closed cell polyurethane rod; size to suit physical requirements of joint in accordance with expansion joint recommendations of TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of reference standards and manufacturer's

recommendations including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, additive content, type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures required to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application intended.

3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates at tile installation areas for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of tile work. 1. Verify that substrates are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil, waxy films, and curing

compounds. 2. Verify that grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical devices, mechanical

components, and similar items located in or behind tile have been completed before commencing tile work.

3. Where tile is scheduled to be thin-set directly to substrata, do not commence installation

of tile until substrate surfaces are within the following tolerances: a. Horizontal Surfaces: Level within 1/8 inch in ten feet in all directions. b. Vertical Surfaces: Plumb within 1/8 inch in eight feet in all directions. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Before proceeding with tile installation, verify that tile has been factory blended in accordance

with requirements specified herein. In not factory blended, return tiles to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site.

3.4 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09300 - 10

A. Tile Installation Standard: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI 108 Series of tile installation standards included under American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile that apply to type of setting and grouting materials and methods of installation indicated.

B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; comply with

specified TCA installation methods. C. Grouting Standard: For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry-set, commercial portland cement, and latex-portland cement), comply with ANSI A108.10. D. Sealer: After setting tile and prior to installation of grout, apply an approved penetrating sealer to exposed tile surfaces. Following installation and curing of grout, apply a second coat of penetrating sealer. E. Except where indicated otherwise, extend tile work into recesses and under or behind

equipment and fixtures to provide a complete covering without interruptions. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

F. Accurately form intersections and returns. Cut and drill tile without marring visible surfaces.

Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight, aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, plumbing devices, and other penetrations to ensure that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

G. Jointing Pattern: Unless indicated otherwise, lay tile in grid pattern. To greatest extent

possible, align joints at adjoining tiles of floor, base, walls, and trim. Center tile fields in both directions at each surface. Adjust layout to minimize cutting. Make joint widths uniform.

H. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints including control,

contraction, and isolation joints where indicated. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles.

1. Standard: TCA EJ171. 2. Locate joints in floor tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 3. Install expansion joint at all floor/wall tile intersections. 3.5 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION METHODS A. Porcelain Tile at Shower Locations 1. TCA Installation: TCA F121 (Cement Mortar Bed). 2. Components a. Concrete subfloor.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09300 - 11

b. Waterproof membrane. c. Mortar bed consisting of one part portland cement and 5 parts damp sand (by

volume); ANSI A108.1B. d. Steel reinforcing mesh. e. Latex-portland cement mortar bond coat. f. Epoxy grout. B. Porcelain Tile at All Other Locations 1. TCA Installation: TCA F113. 2. Components a. Concrete subfloor. b. Latex-portland cement mortar bond coat. c. Epoxy grout. 3.6 SADDLE INSTALLATION METHOD A. Set saddles in latex-portland cement mortar. 3.7 WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHODS A. Porcelain Wall Tile 1. TCA Installation: TCA W244. 2. Components a. Tile backer panel backup (omit waterproof membrane). b. Latex-portland cement mortar bond coat. c. Latex-portland cement grout. 3.8 CURING A. Damp cure tile installations using 40-pound kraft paper cover for minimum 72 hours. B. Use of polyethylene sheeting for curing cover is prohibited.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09300 - 12

3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean ceramic tile surfaces leaving them free from residue, stains, and foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile surfaces immediately after grout

has cured. 2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acidic solutions when permitted and approved by tile

manufacturer; do not use acidic preparations within 14 days following completion of tile installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surfaces with drinkable water before and after cleaning.

B. Polishing: After tile surfaces have been cleaned, polish glazed tile in accordance with tile

manufacturer's instructions. C. Completed Tile Work: Leave finished installations clean and free from cracked, chipped,

broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that tile is without

damage or deterioration at final inspection or acceptance. 1. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic at tiled floors for minimum 7 days after grouting is

complete. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09510 - 1

SECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS A. The specification sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and


1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary to provide acoustical panel ceilings and suspension systems as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Gypsum board ceilings are specified in Section 09260 – GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 1.3 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced below establish minimum requirements for materials, systems and



ASTM C 635 Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings

ASTM C 636 Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels

ASTM E 580 Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic Restraint

ASTM E 1264 Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products ASTM E 1414 Standard Test for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing

a Common Ceiling Plenum 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s product literature and installation instructions for each product

specified. B. Samples:

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09510 - 2

1. Submit the following: a. One 6 inch square sample of each acoustical panel type and pattern. b. One 12 inch long sample of exposed suspension system members and moldings

for each system type required. C. Coordination Drawings: 1. Submit accurately drawn scale drawings showing ceiling penetrations and surface

mounted items including light fixtures, air outlets and inlets, speakers, sprinkler heads, and special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures with adjoining construction.

a. Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0". 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical panel from a

single manufacturer. B. Single Source Responsibility for Suspension Systems: Obtain each type of suspension system

from a single manufacturer. C. Installer Qualifications: Engage installer having minimum 5 years experience on ceiling

installations similar to this Project in material, design, and extent. D. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and

suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components, and partition systems.

E. Reference Standards: 1. Standard for Installation of Suspension Systems: ASTM C 636. 2. CISCA Ceiling Systems Handbook. F. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the


1.6 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical ceilings that are identical to those tested

for following fire performance characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated, by UL or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09510 - 3

acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of testing and inspecting organization.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E

1264 for Class A products. a. Flame Spread: 25 or less. b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to design designations in UL Fire

Resistance Directory for types of assemblies where acoustical ceilings function as a fire-protective diaphragm; tested per ASTM E 119.

a. Lighting Fixtures and Air Ducts: Protect to comply with requirements for rated

assembly. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Enclosure: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof,

wet-work in space completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to Project site in original, unopened packages and store in a

fully enclosed space. Protect from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other damage.

B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, ensure that panel components have achieved room

temperature and stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or otherwise damaging

exposed surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide acoustical panel ceiling products by one of

the following: 1. Acoustical Panels Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09510 - 4

CertainTeed Corp. United States Gypsum Co. or equal as approved by the Professional 2. Wide-Face Double-Web Steel Suspension Systems Armstrong World Industries, Inc. CertainTeed Corp. United States Gypsum Co. or equal as approved by the Professional 3. Edge Moldings Armstrong World Industries, Inc. CertainTeed Corp. United States Gypsum Co. or equal as approved by the Professional 2.2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANELS - GENERAL A. Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Manufacturer's standard units of configuration

indicated, complying with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by reference to type, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflection.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400 (plenum mounting where face of

test specimen is 15 3/4 inches away from test surface) per ASTM E 795. B. Colors and Patterns: Products to match appearance characteristics indicated under each

product type. 1. For acoustical ceiling units whose appearance characteristics are indicated by reference

to ASTM E 1264 designations for pattern, provide the Professional’s selections from each named manufacturer's range of standard products of type, color, pattern, and light reflectance indicated.

C. For ease of reference, acoustical panels indicated are products of Armstrong World Industries,

Inc. Refer to Manufacturers paragraph of this Section for listing of approved manufacturers. 1. Acoustical Panels – ACT: Armstrong Fine Fissured Square Lay-in 24” x 48” x 5/8” with

non-directional fissured surface texture and matte white finish; lay-in installation in wide face exposed suspension system.

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. General: Standard metal suspension systems of type, structural classification, and finish

indicated, complying with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09510 - 5

B. Finishes and Colors: Manufacturer's factory-applied white finish to match respective acoustical panels.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct

Hung. D. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 1. Gage: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,

Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 inch diameter (12 gage).

E. Edge Moldings and Trim: Extruded or formed aluminum with white baked enamel finish. F. Metal Suspension Systems 1. ACT Wide-Face Double-Web Steel Suspension Systems: Main and cross-runners roll-

formed from prepainted or electrolytic zinc-coated cold-rolled steel sheet with 15/16 inch wide prefinished flanges.

a. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts for

compliance with requirements. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at

opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half-width units at border and comply with Reflected Ceiling Plan.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical ceiling systems in compliance with Reference Standards and

manufacturer's instructions. B. Arrange acoustical units as indicated on Drawings. C. Installation of Suspension Systems

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09510 - 6

1. Attach ceiling hangers to building structural members. Do not attach hangers to roof deck.

2. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within

ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension systems. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other obstructions within ceiling plenum interfere with

specified spacing of hangers, install supplemental suspension members and hangers to form trapezes or equivalent supporting shapes. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established in reference standards.

4. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structure or to inserts,

eyescrews, or other devices selected to suit substrate. 5. Unless indicated otherwise, space hangers not more than 4'-0" on centers along each

member supported directly from hangers; locate hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of members.

6. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where

necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. a. Secure moldings to substrates using screws spaced not more than 16 inches on

centers; locate screws not more than 3 inches from ends. Level moldings with ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12'-0". Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

7. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system with edges concealed by

support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and penetrations.

a. Install hold-down clips where required for fire-resistance ratings or where

required by governing regulations; unless otherwise indicated or required, space as recommended by panel manufacturer.

3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceiling panels, trim, moldings, and suspension members.

Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired.

END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09900 - 1

SECTION 09900 – PAINTING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS A. The specification sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and


1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary to paint interior and exterior surfaces as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Additional or supplemental painting requirements may be specified in other sections of

the Specifications. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced below establish minimum requirements for materials, systems and


AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS (ACGIH)

ACGIH TLV-BKLT Threshold Limit Values (TLVs) for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents and Biological Exposure Indices (BEIs)

ACGIH TLV-DOC Documentation of Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices


ASTM D 235 Standard Specification for Mineral Spirits (Petroleum Spirits) (Hydrocarbon Dry Cleaning Solvent)

ASTM D 523 Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss ASTM D 2092 Preparation of Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Surfaces for Painting ASTM D 4263 Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method ASTM D 4444 Standard Test Methods for Use and Calibration of Hand-Held Moisture

Meters ASTM F 1869 Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using

Anhydrous Calcium Chloride

CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)

29 CFR 1910.1000 Air Contaminants

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09900 - 2

GREEN SEAL ENVIRONMENTAL STANDARDS GS 11 Environmental Standard for Paint

MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI)

Master Paint Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual MPI 2 Aluminum Heat Resistant Enamel (up to 427 C and 800 F) MPI 4 Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler MPI 17 Bonding Primer (Water Based) MPI 19 Inorganic Zinc Primer MPI 20 Epoxy Zinc Rich Primer MPI 21 Heat Resistant Enamel, Gloss, (Up to 205 C or 400 F) MPI 23 Surface Tolerant Metal Primer MPI 39 Interior Latex-based Wood Primer MPI 44 Interior Latex MPI Gloss Level 2 MPI 45 Interior Primer Sealer MPI 47 Interior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss MPI 50 Interior Latex Primer Sealer MPI 79 Marine Alkyd Metal Primer MPI 90 Interior Wood Stain, Semi-Transparent MPI 94 Exterior Alkyd, Semi-Gloss MPI 95 Fast Drying Metal Primer MPI 101 Cold Curing Epoxy Primer MPI 107 Rust Inhibitive Primer (Water-Based) MPI 108 High Build Epoxy Marine Coating MPI 110 Interior/Exterior High Performance Acrylic MPI 134 Waterborne Galvanized Primer MPI 138 Interior High Performance Latex, MPI Gloss Level 2 MPI 141 High Performance Semigloss Latex, White and Tints - Gloss Level 5 MPI 144 Institutional Low Oder / VOC Interior Latex, MPI Gloss Level 2 MPI 145 Institutional Low Odor / VOC Interior Latex, Gloss Level 3 MPI 147 Institutional Low Odor / VOC Interior Latex, Gloss Level 5 MPI 151 Interior Waterborne Light Industrial Coating, MPI Gloss Level 3 MPI 153 Interior Waterborne Light Industrial Coating, MPI Gloss Level 5 MPI 161 Exterior Waterborne Light Industrial Coating, MPI Gloss Level 3 MPI 163 Exterior W.B. Light Industrial Coating, Semi-Gloss, MPI Gloss Level 5

(Formerly, MPI # 110 - Gloss Level 5) Master Paint Institute Maintenance Repainting Guide

THE PENNSYLVANIA CODE Title 25 Environmental Protections Chapter 130 Standards for Products

Subchapter C Architectural & Industrial Maintenance Coatings

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09900 - 3

VOC Content Limits for Architectural and Industrial Maintenance Coatings

SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)

SCS-EPP-SP01-01 Environmentally Preferable Product Specification for Architectural and Anti-Corrosive Paints

SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS

(Formerly STEEL STRUCTURAL PAINTING COUNCIL (SSPC))SSPC Manuals Guide to Good Painting Practices,

Volume 1 and 2 SSPC PA 1 Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting SSPC PA 3 Safety in Paint Application SSPC VIS 1 Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel (Standard Reference

Photographs) SSPC VIS 3 Visual Standard for Power- and Hand-Tool Cleaned Steel (Standard

Reference Photographs) SSPC VIS 4 Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by

Waterjetting SSPC SP 1 Solvent Cleaning SSPC SP 2 Hand Tool Cleaning SSPC SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning SSPC SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning SSPC SP 7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning SSPC SP 10 Near-White Blast Cleaning SSPC SP 12 Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard Materials by

High-and Ultra High-Pressure Water Jetting Prior to Recoating

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's technical information, label analysis, and application instructions

for each material proposed. a. Materials List: List each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish

system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

1) When the Design Professional has made final color selections,

Contractor shall indicate color for each item on the Materials List. B. Samples: 1. Submit manufacturer's color charts for initial selection.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09900 - 4

a. Following selection of colors and glosses, submit samples for review. 1) Provide three samples of each color and each gloss for each material on

which finish is scheduled to be applied. 2) Make paint sample panels on 1/2 inch thick gypsum wallboard

approximately 12 inches by 12 inches. 3) If so directed by the DBC, submit samples during progress of the work

consisting of approved paint materials applied to actual surfaces to be painted.

b. Revise and resubmit each sample as requested until required gloss, color, and

texture is achieved. Submitted samples, when approved, will become standards of color and finish for acceptance or rejection of painting work.

c. Do not commence painting work until approved samples are on file at the Project

site. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: To ensure compatibility, provide primers and undercoat paint

produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. B. Coordination: To ensure total system compatibility for various substrates, review and

coordinate requirements for shop-applied primers. On request, furnish data on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.

1. Notify the Professional in writing of problems anticipated using materials specified. C. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint materials for various

coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification are not acceptable.

1. Proprietary names may be used herein to designate materials or colors. It is not intended

that products named are required or that equal products of other manufacturers specified herein are excluded.

D. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced


1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air

temperatures are between 50 degrees F and 90 degrees F.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09900 - 5

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F and 95 degrees F.

C. Do not apply paint during snow, rain, fog, or mist when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent at

temperatures lower than 5 degrees F above dew point; do not apply paint to damp or wet surfaces.

1. Paint application and drying may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and

areas to be painted are enclosed and heated to within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer.

1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Paint, as used herein, means coating systems materials including primers, emulsions, enamels,

sealers, fillers, stains, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to job site in original, unopened packages and containers bearing

manufacturer's name, label, and following data: 1. Product name/identification. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume of pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Volatile organic compounds (VOC). 6. Thinning instructions. 7. Application instructions. 8. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use at one well-ventilated location in tightly covered containers at

minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. 1. Protect paint materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily

rags and waste daily. Institute measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09900 - 6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide paint products by one of the following: Benjamin Moore Pittsburgh Paints Sherwin Williams or equal as approved by the Professional 2.2 PRODUCT REFERENCE A. For ease of reference, paint materials indicated are products of Sherwin Williams; refer to Manufacturers paragraph of this Section for listing of approved manufacturers. 1. Where products of another manufacturer, other than those specified by name in the

Painting Schedule, are proposed by the Contractor and subsequently approved by the Professional for use on this Project, provide a new Painting Schedule compiled in the same format as the Painting Schedule included herein.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS PAINT MATERIALS A. Linseed oil, Shellac, Turpentine, and Other Painting Materials: Pure; highest quality. B. Tinting Colors: Best grade; type recommended by paint manufacturer. C. Provide other materials, subject to approval of the Department, not specifically described but

required for a complete and proper installation. 2.4 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT A. Use equipment and methods recommended by paint manufacturer, and approved by the Design Professional, for application of a specific paint product to a particular surface. B. Prior to use of application equipment, verify compatibility with material to be applied; ensure

that the integrity of the paint finish will not be compromised by its use. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for paint application. Do

not commence paint application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09900 - 7

1. Start of painting operations will be considered as acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 GENERAL A. Paint exposed surfaces except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be

painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Department will select from standard colors or finishes available.

B. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers, exposed

steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment in rooms and areas scheduled to be painted.

C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces,

operating parts, and labels. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation 1. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces,

lighting fixtures, and similar in-place items not scheduled for painting, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Upon completion of painting operations, reinstall previously removed items using workers skilled in trades involved.

a. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and

grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting to prevent dust and other contaminants generated by cleaning operations from contaminating newly painted surfaces.

b. Do not commence application of primer or paint materials until installer has

examined and approved substrate involved. 2. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with manufacturer's instructions

for each specific substrate involved. a. Install barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove primers and reprime. 3. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils and release

agents from concrete and concrete masonry block scheduled to be painted. Where hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use technical methods for surface preparation.

a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods where recommended by paint manufacturer.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09900 - 8

b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. Where surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct condition before application of paint materials. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed instructions.

4. Wood Surfaces and Decorative Panels: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign

substances using scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand exposed-to-view surfaces smooth; remove sanding dust.

a. Immediately following delivery of wood products and decorative panels to

Project site, prime, stain, or seal wood scheduled for painting. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood including cabinets, counters, cases, panels and siding.

b. Where transparent finish is scheduled, backprime with spar varnish. 5. Ferrous Metals: Remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances.

Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of Steel Structures Painting Council.

a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint manufacturer and in

accordance with requirements of SSPC specification SSPC-SP 10. b. Treat bare, sandblasted, or pickled metal with metal treatment wash coat before

priming. c. Touch-up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have become damaged.

Wire brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch-up with same primer as shop coat.

6. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean with non-petroleum-based solvents to remove surface oil

and other contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock using mechanical methods.

7. Existing Corrugated Metal Siding with Paint Containing Lead: a. Pressure wash to remove all loose and bubbled paint. b. Provide environmental protection measures to be taken during surface

preparation and coating of existing corrugated metal siding. Provide a detailed Action Plan including a description of the environmental protection measures to be undertaken so as to ensure complete containment, collection and disposal of removed paint, spent water and all other debris from surface preparation as well as new coating system overspray. The detailed action plan shall also include a detailed description of the proposed methods and procedures, sequence of operations, equipment, detailed drawings of the proposed enclosure system and all other applicable details relating to environmental protection measures during surface preparation and coating.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09900 - 9

b. Water used for high-pressure water washing shall be clean and free from oil, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious substances. The water shall be equal to potable water in physical and chemical characteristics.

c. The Contractor shall ensure that the amount of high pressure washing water is

kept to the absolute minimum by conscientious effort of the Contractor’s workforce and by efficient use of equipment. The Contractor shall control and contain all spent water and removed paint from high pressure washing so as to ensure that it is not deposited into the waterway or onto underlying ground surfaces and all other areas in the vicinity of the Work.

d. When tying into existing coatings, that portion of the existing coating within 300

mm of the edge of the new coating, shall be power washed using potable water to remove all contaminants. The edges of existing coating shall be feathered into areas cleaned to bare steel so that at least 4mm of each coat of the existing coating is exposed.

d. Damaged areas shall be prepared by removing rust, contaminants and by

feathering. The prepared surfaces shall be recoated with an epoxy zinc primer from the low volatile organic compound system. The minimum dry film thickness of the touch-up shall be 75 µm prior to the application of the second and third coats.

e. The Action Plan must be approved prior to start of work and will be monitored

by a Quality Assurance firm, hired by the Professional for compliance. B. Materials Preparation 1. General: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. a. Maintain containers used for paint mixing and application in a clean condition,

free from foreign matter and residue. b. Stir material before application to produce mixture of uniform density; stir as

needed during application. Do not stir surface film into material; remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using.

c. Use approved thinners in limits recommended by paint manufacturer. 2. Tinting: Where multiple coats of same paint material are applied, tint each undercoat a

lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat. Tint to match color of finish coat but provide sufficient differences in shades to distinguish each separate coat.

C. Protection 1. Protect from damage areas and surfaces where work is in progress. a. Provide and spread clean drop cloths where required to provide necessary

protection.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09900 - 10

b. While painting work is in progress, immediately remove accidental splatter,

spillage, and misplaced paint; restore affected surfaces to original undamaged condition.

3.4 SCHEDULING A. Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for

painting as soon as possible after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat

until previous coat feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of additional coat does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion to undercoat.

3.5 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use applicators and

techniques best suited for substrate and material applied. 1. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials at not less than manufacturer's

recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of entire system as recommended by paint manufacturer.

2. Block Fillers: Roller-apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at rate sufficient to

ensure complete coverage with pores filled. a. At walls/partitions to 10 feet above finish floor, back roll with filler over previous application. b. When filler is dry, visually inspect surfaces thin spots or unfilled voids and

pores. Recoat deficient areas as required for complete coverage. c. Proceed with application of undercoat or finish materials only after the

Department’s representative has inspected and approved surfaces involved. 3. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats to non-prime-coated surfaces, apply

prime coat of material recommended by paint manufacturer. To ensure finish coats without burn-through or other defects caused by insufficient or inadequate sealing, recoat primed and sealed surfaces where suction spots or unsealed areas appear in first coat.

4. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Cover surfaces completely to provide opaque, smooth

surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections are not acceptable.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09900 - 11

5. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a surface film of even luster, free from laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.

6. Finished Appearance: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. 7. Workmanship: Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified

requirements. B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental

to formation of a durable paint film. C. Number of coats and film thickness required is same regardless of application method. Do not

apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even, smooth surface.

D. Without increase in Contract price, apply additional coats where undercoats, stains, or other

defects telegraph through final coat until paint film is uniform finish, color, and overall appearance. Ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

E. The term exposed surface includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector

covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings at these locations as necessary to maintain paint system integrity and provide overall surface protection.

1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Prime coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture prior to their final installation.

2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts where visible through registers and grilles with flat,

nonspecular paint. 3. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed

surfaces. 4. Paint exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. F. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. G. Omit primer at touch-up painted, shop-primed metal surfaces. 3.6 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded

paint materials and debris from site. B. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint

by washing and scraping; do not scratch or damage adjacent finish surfaces.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09900 - 12

3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct

damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting as acceptable to the Department. b. Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective

wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations.

1. Upon completion of construction activities of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged

or defaced painted surfaces. 3.8 PAINTING SCHEDULE EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE 1. Ferrous Metal (Including Exposed Gas Piping) a. Priming: Shop Coat - Factory Applied b. Primer: Red Oxide Primer B-50 Kem-Kromic c. Finishing: Two coats A100 Gloss, A8 Series d. Additive: Sand grit to be added on interior and exterior ladders. e. Dry Mil Thickness: Priming - 470 Sq. Ft. per gallon 1.5 mils per coat Finishing - 450 Sq. Ft. per gallon 1.5 mils per coat 2. Galvanized Metal Surfaces a. Priming: Primer over factory applied shop coat. Galvite Primer No. B50W3 b. Finishing: Two coats Industrial Enamel B54 Series c. Dry Mil Thickness: Priming - 300 Sq. Ft. per gallon 2 mils per coat Finishing - 450 Sq. Ft. per gallon 1.5 mils per coat 3. Masonry Surfaces a. Priming: Two coats Promar Interior/Exterior Block Filler b. Finishing: Two coats Elasto-Meric A5 W101 c. Dry Mil Thickness: Priming - 75 Sq. Ft. per gallon 12 mils per coat Finishing - 350 Sq. Ft. per gallon 1.9 mils per coat INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE 1. Ferrous Metal (Including Exposed Gas Piping) a. Priming: Shop Coat - Factory Applied b. Primer: Field coat B50-W1 Kem-Kromic (white) c. Finishing: Two coats B34 W201, Promar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss d. Dry Mil Thickness: Priming - 470 Sq. Ft. per gallon

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09900 - 13

1.5 mils per coat Finishing - 530 Sq. Ft. per gallon 1.5 mils per coat 2. Masonry Surfaces (Semi-Gloss Finish) a. Priming: B25 W25 Promar Block Filler b. Finishing: Two coat Promar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss c. Dry Mil Thickness: Priming - 75 Sq. Ft. per gallon 12 mils per coat Finishing - 400 Sq. Ft. per gallon 1.5 mils per coat 3. Masonry Surfaces (Epoxy Finish) a. Priming: B25 W25 Promar Block Filler b. Finishing: Two coat Tile Clad II Epoxy B62 W100 4. Wood Surfaces (Paint Finish) a. Priming: One coat B 49 W1 Wall and Wood Primer b. Finishing: Two coats B33 W201 Promar 200 Alkyd Eggshell Enamel c. Dry Mil Thickness: Priming - 400 Sq. Ft. per gallon 2 mils per coat Finishing - 530 Sq. Ft. per gallon 1.5 mils per coat 5. Wood Surfaces (Clear Finish) a. Three Coats: Oil Base Gloss Varnish A6691 b. Dry Mil Thickness: 300 Sq. Ft. per gallon; 2 mils per coat 6. Gypsum Wallboard (Flat Finish) a. Priming: One coat Promar 400 Flat Wall B30 W400 b. Finishing: One coat Promar 400 Flat Wall B30 W400 c. Dry Mil Thickness: Priming - 420 Sq. Ft. per gallon 1.5 mils per coat Finishing - 320 Sq. Ft. per gallon 1.5 mils per coat 7. Gypsum Wallboard (Semi-Gloss Finish) a. Priming: One coat Promar 400 Flat Wall B30 W400 b. Finishing: One coat Promar 400 Latex Semigloss B31 W400 c. Dry Mil Thickness: Priming - 420 Sq. Ft. per gallon 1.5 mils per coat Finishing - 320 Sq. Ft. per gallon 1.5 mils per coat 8. Gypsum Wallboard (Epoxy Finish) a. Priming: One coat Acrylic Primer b. Finishing: One coat Tile Clad Epoxy c. Dry Mil Thickness: Priming - 420 Sq. Ft. per gallon 1.5 mils per coat Finishing - 350 Sq. Ft. per gallon

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 09900 - 14

1.5 mils per coat 9. Concrete a. Filler: B25 W25 Promar Block Filler b. Finishing: One coat B25 W25 Promar Block Filler c. Dry Mil Thickness: Filler - 75 Sq. Ft. per gallon 12 mils per coat END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 10170 - 1

SECTION 10170 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS A. The specification sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and



installation of solid plastic toilet compartments, urinal screens, and bench assemblies as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Toilet accessories are specified in Section 10810 - TOILET ACCESSORIES. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced below establish minimum requirements for materials, systems and


COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (CID)

CID A-A-60003 Partitions, Toilet, Complete


FED-STD 795 (Basic) Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)


1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s product data for each type of product specified.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 10170 - 2

a. Submit manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used in the work.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Shop Drawings for fabrication and erection of compartment assemblies and

benches not fully described by Product Data. Include drawings, templates, and directions for anchorage devices installed by others.

C. Samples: 1. Submit full range of color samples. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Measurements: To ensure proper fitting of toilet compartments, take field measurements

prior to preparation of Shop Drawings. B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages required to be built into other work. Coordinate

delivery to avoid delay. C. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the


1.6 COMPLIANCE A. Comply with applicable provisions of Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide solid plastic, floor-mounted/overhead-braced

toilet compartments, urinal screens, shower compartments, benches, and related accessories by the following:

General Partitions Mfg. Corp. Global Partitions Scranton Products, Inc. or equal as approved by the Professional 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Select materials for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces exhibiting

pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, saw marks, or other imperfections are not acceptable.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 10170 - 3

B. Plastic Panels: High density, solid polyethylene (HDPE) with homogenous color throughout,

not less than 1 inch thick, seamless construction with edges machined to radius of .250”. 1. Dividing Panels: 55 inches high, mounted 14 inches above finish floor. 2. Doors: 55 inches high, mounted 14 inches above finish floor. 3. Pilasters: 82 inches high. 4. Color: To be selected by the Design Professional from manufacturer's standard range. C. Pilaster Shoes: Polymer resin with homogeneous color throughout, one-piece construction.

Anchor to floor with No. 5 Plastic Anchors and No. 14 stainless steel Phillips head screws. D. Stirrup Brackets: Full length continuous wall brackets of extruded PVC weighing not less than

.822 pounds per linear foot. Factory predrill brackets with holes spaced 10 inches on centers along full length of brackets. Thru-bolt brackets to panels and pilasters using one-way sex bolts. Fasten wall brackets to pilasters and walls using stainless, steel tamper-resistant torx screws.

1. Use continuous wall brackets for attaching panels to pilasters, pilasters to walls, and

panels to walls. E. Headrail: 6463-T5 aluminum extrusion weighing not less than 1.188 pounds per linear foot,

with mill finish in anti-grip configuration. Shower compartment headrail to contain a channel to accept shower hooks. Fasten headrail to headrail brackets using one-way thru sex bolts; anchor to tops of pilasters using stainless steel, tamper-resistant torx screws.

1. Headrail Brackets: Formed from 16 gage stainless steel with satin finish. Anchor to

walls using No. 14 stainless steel screws. F. Urinal Screens: 18 inches deep, 42 inches high, anchored to wall with a 41 inch long

continuous plastic wall bracket. Mount screen to bracket using stainless steel one-way sex bolts. Mount bracket to wall using stainless steel, tamper-resistant torx screws.

G. Bench Tops: High density, solid polyethylene (HDPE) with homogenous color throughout, not

less than 1 1/2 inches thick, seamless construction with edges machined to radius of .250”. See Drawings for location and sizes.

1. Bench Pedestals: Heavy-duty, black anodized aluminum finish, 16 inches high. Anchor

to bench top and floor surface using stainless steel, tamper resistant torx screws. H. Hook assembly lineals and blocking shall be fabricated from 1 1/2 inch thick HDPE resin with

all edges machined to radius of .250”. Fasteners shall be stainless steel, tamper-resistant design.

I. Hardware 1. Hinges: Integral-type with no exposed metal parts. Hinge mechanism shall consist of a

1/2 inch diameter nylon gravity/cam unit with a 3/16 inch stainless steel center pin (bottom) and a 1/2 inch nylon rod (top), factory-set and assembled.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 10170 - 4

2. Latch and Housing: Heavy 6463-T5 extruded aluminum housing with clear anodized finish, surface-mounted and thru-bolted to pilaster with one-way sex bolts. Slide bolt and button to be heavy aluminum with black anodized finish.

3. Strike and Keeper: Heavy 6463-T5 aluminum extrusion with wrap-around flange surface

and clear anodized finish; surface-mount and thru-bolt to pilaster with one-way sex bolts. a. Strike Plates: Heavy-duty 6 inch aluminum. 4. Coat Hooks: Combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door hitting

mounted accessories; Bobrick Model B-982 or approved equal. Hook shall snap down if excessively loaded (for safety and to thwart vandalism).

5. Door Pulls: Manufacturer’s standard design, heavy-duty chromium-plated non-ferrous

cast alloy. 6. Door Stops: Manufacturer’s standard design, heavy-duty chromium-plated non-ferrous

cast alloy, rubber-tipped for outswinging doors. J. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, with

theft-resistant type heads and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized, cadmium-plated, or rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. General: Unless indicated otherwise, furnish standard doors, panels, and pilasters fabricated for

compartment systems. Provide cutouts and drilled holes for compartment-mounted hardware and accessories.

B. Doors: Unless indicated otherwise, furnish 24 inch wide inswinging doors at ordinary toilet

stalls and minimum 32 inch wide outswinging doors at stalls equipped for use by the physically challenged.

1. Each door shall be furnished with one coat hook/bumper. At compartments for the

physically challenged, furnish one coat hook/bumper, one door pull, and one wall stop. C. Overhead Bracing and Supports: Provide for setting and securing continuous extruded

aluminum overhead bracing along tops of pilasters. Furnish HDPE shoe at each pilaster to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 10170 - 5

3.2 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, surfaces, and conditions where plastic compartments and benches are to be

installed. Correct defects potentially detrimental to proper performance of installations. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Installation of toilet compartments, shower compartments, urinal screens, benches, and

related components will be considered as indication of acceptance of conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install toilet compartments, urinal screens, and benches in strict accordance with

approved Shop Drawings, applicable requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures. Anchor all components firmly in position for long life under hard use.

B. Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. Install

compartment panels rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels. Secure panels to walls using continuous wall-mounted bracket. Where possible, locate wall brackets to position wall mounting holes in masonry or tile joints.

1. Leave no evidence of drilling, cutting, or patching in the finished work. C. Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten installation using

devices furnished. Anchor overhead brace to each pilaster using not fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors and adjust to parallel alignment with overhead brace when in a closed position.

D. Doors: Clearance at vertical edges of doors shall be uniform from top to bottom and shall not

exceed 3/16 inch. 1. Adjust doors, except doors at compartments for the physically challenged, to remain at a

uniformly open position when unlocked. 2. Set doors at compartments for the physically challenged to return to fully closed position. 3.4 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. B. Touch-up scratches and abrasions to be completely invisible to the unaided eye from a distance

of five feet. C. Clean exposed surfaces of compartment systems using materials and methods recommended by

manufacturer. Provide protection necessary to prevent damage or deterioration until Final Inspection.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 10170 - 6

D. Protection: Provide protection of finish surfaces until the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 10440 - 1

SECTION 10440 - INTERIOR SIGNS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS A. The specification sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and


1.2 SUMMARY A. Furnish labor, material, equipment, and appliances necessary to provide interior signs at toilet

rooms doors and egress doors and exit ways. B. Provide specialty building directory, DGS interior plaques. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced below establish minimum requirements for materials, systems and


ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)

AA DAF-45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes AA PK-1 Registration Record of Aluminum Association Alloy Designations and

Chemical Composition Limits for Aluminum Alloys in the Form of Castings and Ingot

AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)

AAMA 2605-02 Superior Performance Organic Coatings


ANSI Z97.1 Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings


ASTM B 209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate ASTM B 221 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles,

and Tubes ASTM C 1036 Flat Glass


D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 10440 - 2

AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code – Aluminum


NFPA 70 National Electrical Code


FED-STD 795 (Basic) Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards



1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data for materials, fabrication, and installation. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Shop Drawings for fabrication and erection. Include plans, elevations, and large-

scale details of sign wording and letter layout. Show anchorages and accessory items. Furnish location template drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent construction.

C. Samples: 1. Submit samples of each color and finish required. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain interior signs from a single manufacturer. B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the


1.6 CODE COMPLIANCE A. Comply with provisions of Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) for following: 1. Character proportion. 2. Character height.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 10440 - 3

3. Raised braille characters and pictograms. 4. Finish and contrast. 5. Mounting location and height. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide paint products by one of the following: ASI Signage Innovations ARK Ramos Foundry & Mfg. Inc. Best Manufacturing Sign Systems or equal as approved by the Professional 2.2 PRODUCT REFERENCE A. For ease of reference, toilet room signs indicated are products of Best Manufacturing Sign

Systems. Refer to Manufacturers paragraph of this Section for listing of approved manufacturers.

2.3 TOILET ROOM SIGNS A. General: At each Toilet Room door, provide manufacturer's standard plastic word and picture

signs with engraved symbols, raised copy, and braille translation. B. Manufacturer: Best Manufacturing Sign Systems 1. Size: 6" x 7 3/4". 2. Style: Equivalent to WP287RB (Men, wheel chair pictogram); WP288RB (Women,

wheel chair pictogram). 3. Thickness: 1/8 inch. 4. Minimum Letter/Numeral Size: 5/8 inch. 5. Minimum Border: 3/8 inch all around. 6. Corners: Radiused. 7. Material: MP plastic.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 10440 - 4

8. Color: As selected by the Design Professional from manufacturer’s standard range. 9. Mounting: Vandal-proof stainless steel fasteners. 2.4 BUILDING DIRECTORIES A. Building Directories: Building directories shall be lobby directories surface mounted, non-

illuminated, wall hung, with message strips. Message content shall be as provided by Using Agency. Minimum size shall be 36 inches high by 48 inches long.

B. Header Format: Header format shall be Helvetica Medium, uppercase. Imprint color. C. Door Construction: Two door, extruded aluminum door frame shall be of same finish as surrounding frame. 1. Corners shall be mitered and assembled with concealed fasteners. Hinges shall be

concealed continuous stainless steel, in natural anodized aluminum finish. 2. Door glazing shall be clear acrylic sheet. Glazing shall be set in frame with resilient

glazing channels. 3. Door locks shall be manufacturer's standard, and shall be keyed alike. D. Fabrication: Extruded aluminum frames and trim shall be ASTM B 221, 6063-T5 extruded

aluminum alloy frame surrounding solid backing plate with PVC laminated to solid backing, provide holes in back plate.

E. Finish and color shall be anodized aluminum as selected by the Design Professional. F. Message Strips: Message strips shall be injection molded plastic with digital computer

generated and photo silk screened typography; provide sufficient strips to fill directory, up-datable by user with book reordering and with 7 to 10 day delivery. Type style shall be Helvetica Medium, size shall be 3/4 inch initial caps. Provide strips with self aligning reveal and flex and stack ability for ease of installation and removal. Imprint color as selected.

G. Directory Capacity: Capacity shall be as follows: 1. Number of sides: one 2. Number of message strips per column: 22 3. Number of Columns: Two

2.5 DGS CAST METAL PLAQUE (Refer to art work at end of this section) A. Manufacturers A.R.K. Ramos

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 10440 - 5

B. Materials 1. Aluminum Castings: Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper recommended by

sign manufacturer for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated. 2. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum

producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of 6063- T5.

3. General: Provide castings free from pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Comply

with requirements specified for metal, border style, background texture, and finish and in required thickness, size, shape, and copy.

4. Border Style: Raised flat band. 5. Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard pebble texture. 6. Mounting: Rosettes and fasteners matching plaque finish for substrates encountered. 7. Cast-Metal Plaque Finishes 8. Raised Areas: Hand-tool and buff borders and raised copy to produce manufacturer's

standard satin finish. 9. Cast-Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using exposed fasteners with rosettes attached

through face of plaque into wall surface. C. Location: Coordinate final location with the Department and Using Agency.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 10440 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, surfaces, and conditions where interior signs are to be installed. Correct

defects potentially detrimental to proper performance of installations. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Coordinate exact location of interior signs with the Department’s field

representative.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 10440 - 7

B. Install signs flush, square, and true to plane. Do not overdraw fasteners. C. Mounting Location: Unless indicated otherwise, mount signs on wall at strike side of door. 1. Mounting Height: 60 inches above floor to centerline. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Following installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. B. Institute measures required to protect installed signs from damage and deterioration until acceptance. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 10810 - 1

SECTION 10810 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS A. The specification sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and



installation of toilet accessories as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 1. Blocking is specified in Section 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The publications referenced below establish minimum requirements for materials, systems and


AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT

28 CFR Part 36 ADA Standards for Accessible Design AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

ANSI A117.1 Guidelines for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING MATERIALS (ASTM)

ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. ASTM A167 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and

Strip. ASTM A269 Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General

Service.


FED-STD 795 (Basic) Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards


D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 10810 - 2

36 CFR 1191 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for

Buildings and Facilities 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's Product Data for each item specified; include details of

construction, dimensions, gages, profiles, method of mounting, specified options, and finishes.

B. Setting Drawings: 1. Where cutouts are required in other work, provide templates, substrate preparation

instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and for installation of anchorage devices.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory and for units exposed to view in same area.

B. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced


1.6 CODE COMPLIANCE A. Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI 117.1 - 2003. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to

avoid interference and to ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing.

1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's written 15 year warranty against silver spoilage of mirrors, agreeing to

replace mirrors that develop visible defects within warranty period.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 10810 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide paint products by one of the following: American Specialties, Inc. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Bradley Corp. or equal as approved by the Professional 2.2 PRODUCT REFERENCE A. For ease of reference, toilet room signs indicated are products of Bobrick. Refer to

Manufacturers paragraph of this Section for listing of approved manufacturers. 2.3 TOILET ACCESSORIES

A. Mirrors

1. Bobrick B-290 Series Framed Mirrors or approved equal; 1/4 inch thick glass electrolytically copper plated, satin stainless steel finish; one-piece roll formed stainless steel frame. Galvanized steel back attached to frame with concealed screws. Secured to concealed wall hanger with two theft-resistant locking screws. B. Paper Towel Dispenser 1. To be supplied by Using Agency and installed by Contractor. C. Surface Mounted Toilet Tissue Dispenser

1. To be supplied by Using Agency and installed by Contractor.

D. Surface-Mounted Soap Dispensers

1. To be supplied by Using Agency and installed by Contractor. E. Stainless Steel Utility Hook

1. Bobrick Model B-682 Utility Hook shall be constructed entirely of type 304 stainless

steel with satin finish. Flange and support arm shall be equipped with a concealed, mounting bracket secured to a wall plate with a stainless steel set screw. Hook shall be welded to support arm. Fastenings and mounting plates shall be concealed.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 10810 - 4

F. Grab Bars 1. Bobrick B-6806 Series or approved equal; 1 1/2 inch diameter, peened grip, concealed

mounting with snap flange, lengths and configurations as shown on the Drawings, satin stainless steel finish.

G. Shower Curtain Hooks 1. To be supplied by Using Agency and installed by Contractor. H. Folding Shower Seat 1. Bobrick Reversible Folding Shower Seat Model B-5181 constructed of water-resistant,

ivory-colored ½” thick solid phenolic. Frame and mounting brackets are type 304 stainless steel and feature self-locking mechanism. Comply with barrier free accessibility guidelines.

I. Surface Mounted Roll Paper Towel Dispenser 1. To be supplied by Using Agency and installed by Contractor. J. Baby Changing Station 1. Baby-Changing Station: (Bradley Model No. 961) - Surface mounted baby changing

station shall be grey and white speckled colored molded, high density polyethylene. Hinge shall have full length steel hinge pin and concealed gas shock. Unit shall include dual integrated paper liner dispensers, molded-in graphics, integral bag hook, and safety strap with unbreakable buckle. Unit shall be operable with less than 5 lbs. of force and shall withstand a static load of 300 lbs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, surfaces, and conditions where toilet accessories are to be installed. Correct defects potentially detrimental to proper performance of installations. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install toilet accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using

fasteners appropriate for substrate involved. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored, at locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Anchor mirror units to walls using special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws; provide concealed,

tamperproof installation. Set units plumb, level, and square.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 10810 - 5

3.3 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation; verify that mechanisms, if any, function

smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish exposed surfaces after removing labels and protective coatings. C. Protect toilet accessories from damage or deterioration until acceptance. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17000-1

SECTION 17000 – REMOVAL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS A. The specification sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and


B. The procedures specified herein are guidelines for minimum performance. The Contractor is

responsible for his own methods of operations and conformance to regulatory codes, rules and guidelines. The Contractor is required to obtain all permits, licenses and approvals to perform the work, including any rights to use patented systems.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. The scope of work for this project covers the supplying of all labor, tools, materials,

equipment, services and appurtenances to accomplish the work specified and indicated on the contract drawing. The work shall be performed to the complete satisfaction of the Department in accordance with the current EPA and OSHA regulations, State Labor and Industry and Department of Environment Protection regulations and any other applicable State and Local Government regulations.

B. Contractor shall submit an Action Plan which describes specifically how abatement work is to

be completed for each abatement sequence. At a minimum the work Plan shall address work area preparation, work practices, decon location, estimated completion dates, respiratory protection, and disposal. Approval of the Action Plan must be obtained through the Professional prior to the start of work. Procedures outlined in the Action Plan must be followed throughout the abatement phase. Any changes in Action Plan must obtain prior approval from Professional.

C. Work under this project includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Removal of eleven (11) elbows on the blue-green lines in the Mechanical Room. 2. Removal of approximately 1,115 square feet of vinyl asbestos tile and asbestos

containing mastic in Personal Storage 117. 1.3 CONTROL OF WORK A. All work which does not conform to the requirements of the contract, plans and specifications

will be considered unacceptable. B. Unacceptable work, whether the result of poor workmanship, use of defective materials,

damage through carelessness, or any other cause found to exist prior to the final acceptance of the work, shall be corrected immediately and replaced in an acceptable manner.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17000-2

C. All bidders should inspect job site prior to bidding to determine job conditions. D. If the Department finds the materials furnished, work performed, or the finished product not

within reasonably close conformity with the plans and specifications and have resulted in an unacceptable finished product, the affected work or material shall be removed and replaced or otherwise corrected by and at the expense of the Contractor.

E. The term "reasonably close conformity" shall not be construed as waiving the Contractor's

responsibility to complete the work in accordance with the plans, contract and specifications. The term shall not be construed as waiving the Department's right to insist on strict compliance with the requirements of the contract, plans and specifications during the Contractor's prosecution of the work, when in the Department's opinion and judgement such compliance is essential to provide an acceptable finished work.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Consultant: 1. The Lead Contractor shall contract for a Quality Assurance Consultant Project Monitor

hereafter referred to as ‘Consulting Firm’ which specializes in performing air sampling, project monitoring and inspections on asbestos abatement projects. The testing laboratory shall as a minimum be accredited by the NIOSH PAT Program (Proficiency Analytical Testing) for PCM asbestos air analysis, and NVLAP for asbestos bulk analysis.

2. The Consulting Firm will be responsible for certifying the project was completed in

accordance with all federal, state, and local asbestos standards and regulations. 3. The Consulting Firm and Asbestos Abatement Contractor must complete the

Certification of Visual Inspection form found at the end of this section for each work area completed.

4. The Consulting Firm shall review the Contractors Action Plan which describes

specifically how work is to be completed for each abatement phase. Approval of the Action Plan must be obtained through the Professional prior to the start of work.

B. Contractor Experience: 1. The Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall have a minimum of three (3) years experience

in the asbestos abatement business. He shall have successfully completed three (3) projects of similar or larger size and dollar value to this project and shall not have defaulted on an asbestos abatement project within the last three (3) years. The Contractor shall be certified by Pennsylvania Department of Labor and Industry.

C. Worker Certification: 1. The Contractor shall furnish proof that his employees have had instruction on the

dangers of asbestos exposure, on respirator use, decontamination and current OSHA and EPA regulations.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17000-3

2. Documentation of workers medical exams, consist of x-rays and pulmonary function

shall be submitted and as may be required by current OSHA and EPA regulations and any applicable State and Local Government regulations.

3. There must be on site at all times, an EPA Certified Asbestos Abatement Supervisor.

The Asbestos Abatement Supervisor shall have successfully completed a 5-day EPA Certified Practices and Procedures Course as per 40 CFR, Part 763, Subpart E, Appendix C-EPA Model Accreditation Plan (must provide a copy of certificate from EPA approved course). All asbestos workers shall have successfully completed a 4-day EPA Certified Practices and Procedures Course as per 40 CFR, Part 763, Subpart E, Appendix C-EPA Model Accreditation Plan. The Contractor must provide copies of certificates from Pennsylvania Department of Labor and Industry for all workers, and supervisors as required by regulation.

4. When required by the Pennsylvania Department of Labor and Industry (PDL&I) the

Contractor, Abatement Supervisor, and Abatement Workers shall be licensed by (PDL&I). Each worker/supervisor shall have a current photo identification issued by PDL&I available on request by the Department when required.

1.5 POSTING OF REGULATIONS A. The Contractor will have at all times in his possession at his office one (1) copy and in view at

the job site one (1) copy, current OSHA Regulations 29 CFR 1926.1101, Asbestos and current Environmental Protection Agency 40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M: National Emission Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants as related to asbestos stripping, emissions, notification, work practices and disposal of asbestos waste.

1.6 REGULATORY SUBMITTALS (CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY) A. The Contractor is required to notify the building occupants and the following agencies in

writing ten (10) days prior to starting work for notification and instructions concerning proper disposal of asbestos waste material.

1. United States Environmental Protection Agency - Region III Asbestos - NESHAP Coordinator (3AT33) 841 Chestnut Building Philadelphia, PA 19106 2. Pennsylvania Department of Environmental Protection Bureau of Air Quality Control Regional Manager 3. Pennsylvania Department of Labor and Industry Asbestos Occupation Accreditations & Certification Bureau of Occupational and Industrial Safety Room 1623 Labor and Industry Building Seventh & Forster Streets Harrisburg, Pennsylvania 17120

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17000-4

4. Where work is performed in Allegheny County or City of Philadelphia, appropriate

notification must also be made. Obtain permits as required by local regulations. 5. EPA, DEP approved asbestos landfill proposed to be used by the Contractor for RACM.

Submit completed WSR for RACM at projects end (see 3.07, F). 1.7 AIR TESTING AND MONITORING A. Air sampling of the work areas and surrounding environment will be conducted during the

performance of this contract by the Consulting Firm so as to ensure abatement procedures are in compliance with all codes, regulations, ordinances and this specification.

B. The Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Consulting Firm and all others responsible for

testing and inspecting the work. C. Air testing and analyses shall be in accordance with current EPA and requirements of Section

29 CFR 1926.1101 of the current OSHA Regulations, as a minimum. Analysis shall be performed by Phase Contrast Microscopy per NIOSH 7400 Method and/or Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) per EPA Level II (AHERA) analytical procedures.

D. Air tests taken prior to start of work (background) and at completion (pre-clearance) will be

analyzed by PCM-Phase Contrast Microscopy. Final (clearance) testing shall be by TEM-Transmission Electron Microscopy.

E. The Consulting Firm shall give verbal notification to the Department of the results of each test

within twenty-four (24) hours of the time the samples were delivered to the laboratory. The Consulting Firm shall confirm the results in writing within three (3) days thereafter. A microscope on site for PCM analyses is acceptable to facilitate a faster turn-around time.

F. Prompt reports are necessary so that, if required, modifications to work methods and/or

practices may be implemented as soon as possible. G. Representatives of the Consulting Firm shall have access to the work area at all times. The

Contractor shall provide facilities for such access in order that the Consulting Firm may properly perform its function.

H. Sampling equipment and personnel will be provided by the Consulting Firm. I. Air sampling shall be performed in each work area prior to commencement of the work at that

location. The highest fiber count reading during pre-clearance clean-up monitoring shall be lower than the background readings established by pre-job monitoring or 0.01 f/cc, whichever is lower. When the criteria is met, perform final clearance testing by Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) using EPA Level II methodology. Clearance criteria is 70 s/mm2 for fibers greater than .5 microns in length with an aspect ratio 5:1.

J. Air samples shall be taken in accordance with, but not necessarily limited to, the following

schedule:

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17000-5

AREA

WHEN NUMBER MINIMUM VOLUME

(liters)

FLOW RATE

(liters/min.) Work Area(PCM) Prior to job start 2 1500 2-10 Work Area(PCM) During area isolation Daily1 480-960 1-2 Work Area-Inside (PCM)

During abatement work

Daily1 480-960 1-2

Work area Exterior (PCM)2 During abatement work Daily1 1000 2-10 Work Area(PCM)4 Upon work(pre-

clearance)completion 2(minimum) 1500 2-10

Work Area (TEM)4

At completion (final)

13 1200 2-10

SCHEDULE NOTES: 1 Consecutive daily air samples will be collected during abatement to yield a minimum of eight (8) hours

of sampling time for each active work area.

2 Exterior work area(s) samples shall be collected daily at decon clean room entrance, load out exit, discharge of HEPA exhaust units, and area(s) adjacent to work area(s) that are occupied or will be re-occupied.

3 One sample collected and analyzed per work area; archive remaining filter for one year. 4. Aggressive air sampling must be conducted when work area is prepared as a negative pressure

enclosure. K. Work area clearance testing shall be completed before work site protective barriers are

removed. L. The Contractor is responsible for performing the thirty (30) minute excursion air sampling per

OSHA regulations. M. The Contractor is responsible for performing 8 hour TWA personal air samples in the

employees breathing zone per OSHA regulations. 1.8 AIR FILTERING - (FOR GUIDELINE PURPOSES ONLY) A. An approved negative pressure machine may be used in the active work area using HEPA

equipped air movement units. B. Air may be drawn from clean areas through the decontamination and active work areas, HEPA

filtered and exhausted through air movement units to the containment exterior. Replace filters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to meet the needs of this specification.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17000-6

C. Air movement should be sufficient quantity to ensure a minimum of four (4) air changes per hour.

Example: Active work area = 50' x 50' x 20' H = 50,000 cu. ft. For four air changes per hour = 4 AC/HR x 50,000 CF/AC = 200,000 cu.ft./hr. In cubic feet per minute = 200,000 CF/HR : 60 min/hr = 3,333 cu. ft./minute

This active work area would require a combination of air movement/HEPA units, i.e., 2,500 CFM and 1,500 CFM

D. The exhaust system must be sufficient to maintain a minimum pressure differential of -0.02

inches of water relative to unsealed, adjacent area. Provide continuous, twenty-four (24) hours per day monitoring of the pressure differential with an automatic recording instrument.

E. The exhaust system(s) will run twenty-four (24) hours/day until final clearance is obtained and

will be maintained in accordance with ANSI Z9.2 and the manufacturers directions. F. To ensure continuous operation, the Contractor shall have a spare negative exhaust unit

available. 1.9 ALTERNATIVE AIR FILTERING METHODS A. Other approved air filtering methods may be utilized at the Contractor's discretion, with the

stipulation that designated regulatory agencies provide documented approval to the Department. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to submit all documentation required to the appropriate regulatory agency for their review and approval.

1.10 PLACEMENT OF WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. The Contractor shall furnish and place warning signs at all approaches to asbestos control areas

containing concentrations of airborne asbestos fibers. Locate warning signs at such a distance that personnel may read the warning sign and take the necessary protective action required before entering the area. Warning signs shall be in place for the duration of the work. The Contractor shall furnish and attach caution labels to all disposal containers holding asbestos materials, scrap waste, debris and other products contaminated with asbestos.

B. Warning Signs: Provide warning signs conforming to 29 CFR 1926.1101 with the following

legend:

DANGER ASBESTOS

CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY

RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING ARE REQUIRED IN THIS AREA

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17000-7

C. Caution Labels: Attach label to the outside of all disposal bags and containers which hold asbestos contaminated materials and are to be removed from the site. Caution labels shall be printed in letters of sufficient size and contrast so as to be readily visible and legible and shall display the following legend:

DANGER

CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS AVOID CREATING DUST

CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD D. Identification Labels: Attach label to the outside of all disposal bags and containers which

hold asbestos contaminated materials and are to be transported off facility site. Identification labels shall display the following legend:

Waste Generator Name: ___________Fill Out____________________ Generator Location: ___________Fill Out_____________________ E. Transportation marking shall conform to 49 CFR 171 and 172 and shall be provided on all

containers with more than one pound of friable asbestos. Transportation marking shall display the following legend:

R Q HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE

SOLID, NOS ORM-E, NA 9188

(ASBESTOS) PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. The list of required materials will include, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Respirators: Provide respiratory protection in accordance with OSHA Regulation 29

CFR 1926.1101 and appendices ANSI Z88.2-1980. Respiratory protection regardless of negative exposure assessments. There shall be NO EXCEPTION to this requirement. As minimum protection, negative pressure air purifying respirators shall be worn. Contractor shall select the appropriate respirator based on an initial exposure assessment or exposure monitoring results. No employee or visitor shall enter any area without this protection until clearance has been obtained. Employees or visitors shall wear a respirator. Respirators shall be NIOSH approved. Ensure proper filters are worn using a HEPA as a minimum.

2. Protective Clothing: a. Disposable Clothing – such as "Tyvek" by DuPont. Clothing shall consist of

coverall, head cover and foot cover. Gloves will be worn for hand cover as needed.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17000-8

3. Wetting Agents - The asbestos material will be sprayed with water containing an additive to enhance penetration. The additive, or wetting agent, will be polyoxyethylene at a concentration of one (1) ounce per five (5) gallons of water or as otherwise specified by manufacturer. A fine spray of this solution must be applied to prevent fiber disturbance proceeding the removal of the asbestos material. The asbestos will be sufficiently saturated to prevent emission of airborne fibers in excess of the exposure limits prescribed in the current OSHA standards referenced in these specifications. DRY REMOVAL WILL NOT BE ALLOWED EXCEPT WITH WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM EPA or BECAUSE OF FREEZING WORK AREA TEMPERATURES.

4. Polyethylene sheeting: Six (6) mils, for protection of floors, walls, doors, windows,

fixed equipment, HVAC supply and return openings, and critical barriers. 5. Polyethylene bags (with warning labels) six (6) mils minimum for disposal. All asbestos

that is removed shall be double bagged. 6. Tape: High quality vinyl or fabric duct tape. Paper masking tape will not be permitted. 7. Negative Pressure Filtration Equipment: Air movement and filtering equipment

equipped with HEPA filters rated at 99.97% removal down to 0.3 microns, and of sufficient capacity to provide a minimum of four (4) air changes per hour for each active work area.

8. Airless Spray Equipment: Electric airless spray equipment for saturating and mist fiber

control. Low pressure (500 psi) equipment must be available on-site and utilized as required.

9. Vacuum: HEPA rated for surface cleaning and house-keeping. Hand operated and

power tools such as, but not limited to, saws, corers, abrasive wheels and drills should be provided with local exhaust ventilation systems with HEPA filters.

10. Hand Tools: Brooms, plastic shovels, scrapers, brushes, etc., in sufficient quantity to

ensure the appropriate level of housekeeping. 11. Water Filtration System: Shower and contaminated water filtration system. 12. GFI Equipment: All electrical connections in the work area must be through "ground

fault" protected outlets/circuits. 13. Penetrating Encapsulant: Penetrating encapsulants to be used on this project are

International Cellulose Corporation SK-13 Asbestos Encapsulant, International Protective Coatings Corporation Serpiflex Shield, Fiberlock Technology ABC Asbestos Binding Compound Concentrate, and others listed as acceptable in the Environmental Protection Agency - Battelle Laboratory Encapsulant Study, or approved equal.

14. Bridging Encapsulant: Bridging encapsulants to be used on this project are American

Coatings Corporation Cable Coating 2B, Decadex Laboratories Firecheck, Fiberlock Technology ABC Asbestos Binding Compound Concentrate, or approved equal.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17000-9

B. The Contractor will have at all times in his possession at the job site Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for wetting agents, encapsulants, solvents, strippers, and any other potentially hazardous materials.

2.2 PERSONNEL PROTECTIONS A. Personnel protection is required for laborers, mechanics, supervision and visitors at the work

site during the set-up and abatement operations. B. Each worker shall be supplied with a minimum of two (2) complete protective work clothes

and respirator filter changes per day for the complete duration of the project. Hard hats should be available as appropriate which meet ANSI Z-89.1 standards. Safety toe footwear is to be worn underneath the disposable shoe covers and must meet the requirements and specifications in ANSI Z-41.1. Eye wear and face protection must meet the standards and specifications of ANSI Z-87.1.

C. In addition to sets of protective work clothes for workers, the Contractor shall have on hand

two (2) additional sets of disposable work clothes, per day and respirators for personnel who are authorized to inspect the work site. Hard hats should be available as appropriate which meet ANSI Z-41.1. Eye wear and face protection must meet the standards and specifications of ANSI Z-87.1.

D. Respirators approved for asbestos use and protective work clothes will be worn by laborers and

mechanics as a minimum during set-up operations (plastic draping, light-fixture dropping or removal, etc.).

E. Appropriate respirators will be worn by all personnel in the active work area. F. Upon leaving the active work area, filters will be discarded, cartridges removed and respirators

cleaned in disinfectant solution and clean water rinse. G. Clean respirators will be stored in plastic bags when not in use. H. Respirators will be inspected daily for broken, missing, or deteriorated parts. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 AREA PREPARATION A. Movable furniture, blinds and equipment will be removed from area of work by the Using

Agency. B. Heating and ventilating system servicing the areas of work must be shut down prior to starting

any work. Notify the Institution prior to starting any work in order that they may arrange to have the heating and ventilating system shut down.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17000-10

C. The Contractor shall isolate the work area for the duration of the work by installing critical barriers completely sealing off all openings in the work area, including, but not limited to, heating, ventilation ducts, doorways, corridors, windows, roof ventilator openings, and wall vents, with plastic sheeting taped securely in place with six (6) mils plastic sheeting.

D. The Contractor shall build decontamination chamber(s) to be connected to each active work

area for entrance to or exit from the active work area. When required a separate material load out unit shall be constructed.

E. All floor and wall surfaces in the work areas shall be covered with plastic sheeting taped

securely in place to protect them from water damage and asbestos contamination. F. The Contractor shall cover all fixtures, fixed demountable partitions, lighting, fixed items and

equipment in the work area with plastic sheeting taped securely in place. G. Duct tape, staples, wood strips and other methods will be used appropriately to attach vertical

plastic barriers to walls and to floors. All edges of plastic material shall overlap the adjoining sheet a minimum of twelve inches. All joints (vertical and horizontal) to be continuously sealed with duct tape.

H. Upon completion of area isolation, the Contractor shall remove, where practical, all detachable

electrical heating and ventilation equipment, wipe and vacuum, clean and remove from active work area.

3.2 DECONTAMINATION UNIT (USAGE AND ACTIVITIES) A. Outside room (clean room). In this room the worker leaves all street clothes and dresses in

clean working clothes (usually disposable coveralls). Respiratory protection equipment is also stored in this area. No asbestos contaminated items should enter this room. Workers enter this room either from outside the structure dressed in street clothes, or naked from the showers, after showering.

B. Shower Room: This is a separate room used for transit by cleanly dressed workers entering the

job from the outside room or by workers headed for the showers after undressing in the equipment room.

C. Equipment Room (contaminated area): Work equipment, footwear, additional contaminated

work clothing are left here. This is a change and transit area for workers. D. Decontamination chambers require temporary services. Verify during bidding period the

availability for temporary hook up. Mobilization, hook-up and demobilization, disconnection costs will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Installation of temporary services during demolition shall be per current EPA and OSHA regulations.

E. Work Area: The work area should be separated by polyethylene barriers from the equipment

room. If the airborne asbestos level in the work area is expected to be high, as in dry removal an additional intermediate cleaning space may be added between the equipment room and the work area. Isolation of the work areas, as required, is necessary to prevent contamination and fiber dispersal to other areas of the building during work and clean-up operation. Air

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17000-11

movement will flow uninterrupted from outside the work area through the change and equipment rooms and into the active work area. It is then HEPA filtered and exhausted to the building exterior.

3.3 WORK AREA ENTRANCE/EXIT A. All workers involved in the removal of asbestos will utilize the following procedure for work

area entrance and exit. B. The worker enters the outside room and removes clothing, puts on clean coveralls, gloves and

respirator. Protective clothing sleeves will be taped to gloves and protective clothing legs will be taped to foot covers. The neck collar, zipper seam, wrists and ankles of protective clothing will be taped closed.

C. Worker proceeds via shower room to equipment room. Any additional clothing and equipment

left in equipment room and required by worker is put on. This includes additional warm garments workers usually provide themselves when the work area is too cold for coveralls only. These must be treated as contaminated clothing and left in the decontamination area.

D. Worker proceeds to work area. E. Before leaving the work area, the worker should remove all gross contamination and debris

from the protective clothing, by vacuuming down the clothes with a vacuum cleaner with a HEPA filter. In practice, this is carried out by one worker assisting another.

F. The worker proceeds to equipment room and removes all clothing except respiratory protection

equipment. Extra work clothing may be stored in contaminated end of the area. G. Disposable protective clothing is placed in a bag for disposal. The worker then proceeds into

the shower room. Respiratory protection equipment should only be removed after wetting in shower to prevent inhalation of fibers. Ensure that employees shower every time upon exiting the work area and before entering the clean room.

H. After showering, the worker moves to the clean room and dresses in either new protective

clothes for another entry, or street clothes if leaving. Respirator filters are sealed with tape or thrown away if spent, and respirator body is thoroughly cleaned and brought to the clean room.

I. Workers shall not eat, drink, smoke, chew gum, or chew tobacco in the work area. To eat, drink

or smoke, workers shall exit the work area following the decontamination procedure outlined above.

J. All footwear shall be left inside work area until completion of the job, then cleaned or

discarded. 3.4 METHOD OF REMOVAL A. Remove and dispose of all asbestos-containing materials (ACM) in accordance with the

methods and procedures outlined in the United States Department of Labor, Occupational

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17000-12

Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Asbestos Regulations, Codes of Federal Regulations Title 29, Part 1926, Section 1926.1101.

B. Dry removal will not be allowed except when wet removal will create a safety hazard. Dry

removal process will require written authorization by EPA and the Department except when work area has freezing conditions.

C. Work of this section shall be performed in the following manner: 1. Eliminate air flow into containment area by isolating all supply and return air ducts from

mechanical system. Turn off electrical power. 2. Install six (6) mil polyethylene critical barriers over all doors, wall openings, ceiling

openings, electrical outlets, etc. Secure with duct tape on all sides. 3. Six (6) mil polyethylene protecting ceiling surface from wall to wall. 4. Six (6) mil polyethylene protecting wall surface from floor to ceiling. 5. Isolation barriers separating occupied areas and work areas shall be framed and covered

with 1/2 inch plywood and two (2) layers of six (6) mil polyethylene. 6. Duct HEPA filter unit through door. Locate unit to prevent dead air pockets. 7. Install triple air curtain, six (6) mil polyethylene (typical), over door opening into

decontamination unit or load out unit. 3.5 HOUSEKEEPING A. Throughout the work period, the Contractor shall maintain the building and site in a standard

of cleanliness as specified throughout these specifications. B. Contaminated disposable clothing, respirator filters and other debris will be bagged, properly

labeled and sealed at the end of each work day. C. All asbestos generated by either removal, encapsulation or repair will be bagged, properly

labeled, and sealed at the end of each work day. D. Respirators will be thoroughly cleaned at the end of each work day and stored for the next

day's use. E. Retain all stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, not impeding

traffic, and providing the required protection of materials. F. Do not allow the accumulation of scrap, debris, waste material, and other items not required for

completion of this work. G. At least weekly, and more often if necessary, completely remove all scrap, debris and waste

material from the job site.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17000-13

H. Unless otherwise noted or directed, materials resulting from demolition operations shall be the

property of the Contractor, shall not be used in the work and shall be promptly removed from the site.

I. Daily and more often if necessary, inspect the work areas and adjoining spaces, and pick up all

scrap, debris and waste material. Remove all such items to the place designated for their storage.

J. Provide adequate storage for all items awaiting removal from the job site, observing all

requirements for fire protection and protection of the ecology. K. Maintain the site in a neat and orderly condition at all times. L. Compressed air is not to be used for cleaning purposes. 3.6 FINAL DECONTAMINATION OF WORK AREA A. Following careful double bagging of all removed asbestos material by the Contractor, he shall

label bags as required. B. Bags shall be wiped with clean damp cloths prior to transportation to approved disposal site. C. With critical barriers in place, sheet plastic on walls, floors, and ceiling, the negative pressure

system operating, the Contract shall carry out the first cleaning. If there are two layers of wall, floor, and ceiling plastic, clean outer layer as described below and remove carefully. With one layer of wall, floor, and ceiling plastic in place, use damp cleaning cloth to wipe surfaces of plastic. Use each surface of a cleaning cloth one time and then dispose of as contaminated waste.

D. Continue this cleaning until there is no visible debris from removed material or residue on

plastic sheeting. This first cleaning shall extend to include the Equipment Room (Dirty Room) in the decontamination unit.

E. Pressure washing techniques of any kind are strictly prohibited. F. Pre-Encapsulation Inspection of substrate is performed by Consulting Firm to ensure removal

and cleaning of the substrate is adequate. The Contractor may accompany this inspection. If during the inspection, the substrate or plastic sheeting isn't cleaned to the satisfaction of the Consulting Firm, additional re-cleaning will be required to meet the satisfaction of the Consulting Firm.

G. Encapsulate substrate and all remaining plastic sheeting within the work area. A colored

encapsulant may be used on non-finished surfaces. H. After encapsulant has dried, remove floor, wall, and ceiling plastic carefully by folding

inwards into bundles and bagged for disposal. NOTE: Final barriers are not to be removed until work is completed.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17000-14

I. With critical barriers in place, negative pressure system operating, and immovable objects

covered with plastic sheeting, perform a second cleaning as was done in the first cleaning. Wet mop any hard floor surfaces. HEPA vacuum carpeted area surfaces. Hard surfaced flooring such as concrete, terrazzo, VAT and ceramic tile, shall be wet mopped, allowed to dry, and damp mopped a second time with clean mop heads. All mop heads and cleaning cloths are to be discarded in the same manner as asbestos waste.

J. All surfaces are to be left visually clean. K. Perform visual inspection of work area Consulting Firm and Contractor shall complete

Certification Of Visual Inspection form found at the end of this section. L. The Consulting Firm shall take pre-clearance samples as specified in Air Sample Schedule,

Section 1.07 as soon as feasible but no longer than eight (24) hours after completion of all cleaning work, or as may be specified by the Department. If pre-clearance criteria are met, proceed with air testing for final clearance by Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM).

M. If pre-clearance criteria is not met, repeat final cleaning until additional tests indicate

acceptable levels have been achieved before proceeding with final clearance testing by TEM. Costs associated with additional cleaning and testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

N. After air testing clearance criteria has been met, critical barriers and negative air pressure

system can be removed. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTE A. All RACM and miscellaneous ACM debris will be transported to the predesignated disposal

site in accordance with the guidelines of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Title 40, Part 61, Subpart M, and all local agencies' regulations. Ensure all waste bags/leaktight container have facilities name, address, and contact person as required by NESHAP. Drums are to be used to transport bagged ACM's as required by regulation(s).

B. EPA NESHAP Category I &II nonfriable ACM may disposed of as C&D waste as allowed by

regulation. If nonfriable materials become friable they must then be disposed of as regulated ACM waste in an approved landfill.

C. Workers loading/unloading the asbestos materials and machinery operators will wear

respirators and disposable work clothing when handling material at the project and disposal site. Asbestos warning signs shall be posted on vehicle as required by regulation.

D. The bags may be dumped from the drums into the burial site. If drums are used to transport the

ACM bags, the bags may be dumped from the drums into the burial site. The drums may be reused. However, if a bag is broken or damaged, the entire drum should be buried.

E. The landfill area used for dumping shall be certified to receive and buy materials contaminated

by asbestos.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17000-15

F. Obtain completed Waste Shipment Record (WSR) for all RACM. WSR must also indicate amount of waste in cubic yards. Submit signed WSR with final report/Project Close-out.

3.8 INSPECTIONS A. All work procedures detailed in this specification will be strictly adhered to and meet or exceed

all current EPA, OSHA, DEP, ASTM and PDL&I regulations. B. All work shall meet with the approval of the Department. Work which does not meet with the

approval shall be determined to be unsatisfactory. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17000-16

ASBESTOS CERTIFICATION OF VISUAL INSPECTION

Project Name:_____________________________________________________________ Project Number:___________________________________________________________

Building Name:____________________________________________________________

Work Area Location:_______________________________________________________ ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION In accordance with Project Specifications and scope of work, the abatement contractor hereby certifies that the Abatement Contractor has visually inspected the work area (all surfaces including pipes, beams, ledges, walls, ceiling and floor, decontamination unit, sheet plastic, etc.) and has found no asbestos dust, debris or residue. Abatement Contractor Name:________________________________________________ Signature:___________________________ Print Name:__________________________ Print Title:_________________________________ Date:________________________ QUALITY ASSURANCE CONSULTANT The Quality Assurance Consultant hereby certifies that he/she has accompanied the Abatement Contractor on the visual inspection and verifies that this inspection has been thorough and to the best of his/her knowledge and belief, the Abatement Contractor's certification above is a true and honest one. Quality Assurance Consultant Name:__________________________________________ Inspector Signature:___________________________ Date:________________________ Print Inspector Name:______________________________________________________

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17100-1

SECTION 17100 - REMOVAL / DISPOSAL OF PCB AND MERCURY-CONTAINING MATERIALS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 STIPULATIONS

A. The specifications sections “General Conditions”, “Special Requirements” and “General Requirements” form a part of this section by reference thereto and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The specifications sections “General Conditions”, “Special Requirements” and “General Requirements” form a part of this section by reference thereto and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

B. The Contractor is responsible to furnish all labor, materials, facilities, equipment, services,

permits and agreements necessary to perform the work required for removal of PCB-containing ballasts, mercury-containing light tubes and mercury-containing thermostat devices in accordance with these specifications, and all local, state and federal regulations; (40 CFR 761, Polychlorinated Biphenyls Manufacturing, Processing, Distribution in Commerce and Use Prohibitions); (49 CFR 178, Shipping Container Specifications).

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Work required by this section includes removal, handling and disposal/recycling of all mercury-containing fluorescent light tubes and mercury-containing thermostats located at the Hershey Readiness Center, 1720 East Caracas Avenue, Derry Township, Dauphin County.

B. For the purpose of this project, all ballasts which do not have the term “No PCB’s” printed on

the label must be assumed to be PCB-containing and be removed and disposed of as such. Ballasts which have the term “No PCB’s” printed on the label may be disposed of as construction and demolition waste. Intact, non-leaking PCB containing ballasts (small capacitor) may be disposed of as municipal solid waste, as allowed by regulation. Municipal solid waste landfills, at its option, may not accept non-leaking PCB containing ballasts (small capacitor) due to permitting requirements. It is recommended that mercury florescent bulbs and mercury switch items shall be recycled, as applicable, as opposed to being treated as a hazardous waste items per EPA disposal requirements as outlined in Part 6.

C. Location of Fluorescent Light Tubes and Thermostats are as follows:

1. Removal of eight (8) four-foot fluorescent lighting tubes in the Women’s and IT Rooms. 2. Removal of ninety-six (96) four-foot fluorescent lighting tubes in the Assembly Hall. 3. Removal of two (2) two-foot fluorescent lighting tubes in Women’s. 4. Removal of one (1) thermostat in the Conference Room.

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17100-2

D. The Contractor shall be responsible to verify all material quantities and to determine job site conditions.

PART 2 – ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 2.1 Use special clothing, including but not limited to: disposable gloves (polyethylene) and eye

protection. PART 3 – WORK OPERATIONS 3.1 Ensure that work operations or processes involving PCB ballasts, PCB-contaminated materials

and mercury are conducted in accordance with 40 CFR 761 and the applicable requirements of this section, including but not limited to:

A. Obtaining advance arrangements of recycling / disposal sites. B. Notifying Contracting Officer prior to commencing the operation. C. Reporting leaks and spills to the Contracting Officer.

D. Cleaning up spills. E. Inspecting waste containers for leaks and forwarding copies of inspection reports to the

Contracting Officer. F. Maintaining inspection, inventory and spill records.

3.2 Spill / Cleanup requirements.

A. Immediately report to the Contracting Officer any PCB or mercury spills / leaks. B. Rope off area around edges of leak or spill and post caution signs at the area. C. Initiate cleanup of spills as soon as possible. Mop up any liquid with rags or other

conventional absorbent. The spent absorbent shall be properly contained and disposed of as solid waste.

D. Document the cleanup with records of decontamination in accordance with 40 CFR 761,

Section 125, Requirements for PCB Spill Cleanup. Provide certification of decontamination.

PART 4 - STORAGE / LABELING OF CONTAINERS

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1.1 17100-3

4.1 Store materials in DOT Specification 5, 5B or 17C containers with removable heads – 49 CFR 178. Boxes shall be suitable for fluorescent light tubes. Label containers with the following:

A. Date the item was placed in storage and the name of the cognizant activity and building.

B. Affix caution labels to all hazardous waste containers.

PART 5 - IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 5.1 Identification Number – Federal regulations require that generators, transporters, commercial

storers and disposers of regulated hazardous waste possess U.S. EPA identification numbers. The Contractor shall verify that the activity has a U.S. EPA generator identification number for use on the Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest (EPA form 8700-22). If not, the Contractor shall advise the activity that it must file and obtain an identification number with EPA prior to commencement of removal work. (Not applicable to item listed in 6.01)

PART 6 - TRANSPORTER CERTIFICATION / CERTIFICATE OF DISPOSAL 6.1 Comply with disposal requirements and procedures as outlined in 40 CFR.

A. Intact, non-leaking PCB containing ballasts (small capacitor) may be disposed of as municipal solid waste per 40 CFR 761.60(b) (2) (ii). Ensure that the municipal solid waste landfill will accept non-leaking PCB containing ballasts before transport.

B. Mercury containing fluorescent lamp bulbs may be recycled as universal waste, as an

option, instead of a hazardous waste. C. Mercury containing thermostats may be recycled as universal waste, as an option, instead

of a hazardous waste. DEP, at their option, may accept mercury as a small quantity exempt generator on a one time basis only. Call for information at (814) 332-6839 or (814) 451-6009 (Erie).

6.2 Certificate for the hazardous materials disposed of / recycled shall include:

A. The identity of the disposal facility, by name, address and EPA identification number.

B. The identity of the hazardous waste affected by the Certificate of Disposal including reference to the manifest number for shipment.

C. A statement certifying the fact of disposal / recycling of the identified hazardous waste,

including the dates of disposal and identifying the disposal process used.

D. A certification (for PCB’s) as identified in 40 CFR 761, Section 3. END OF SECTION

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1 TC-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE PAGE NO.

BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR ALL CONTRACTS Notice to Bidders To be issued Table of Contents TC-1 TC-4 Instructions to Bidders To be issued Form of Agreement To be issued Contract Bond To be issued General Conditions of Contract To be issued Prevailing Minimum Wage Predetermination To be issued Special Conditions To be issued List of Drawings LD-1 LD-2

VOLUME 1 of 2

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01010 Summary of Work 01010-1 01010-4 Section 01030 Base Bid Descriptions 01030-1 01030-3 Section 01040 Coordination and Control 01040-1 01040-8 Section 01310 Sequence of Construction & Milestones 01310-1 01310-3 Section 01400 Quality Control Testing Services 01400-1 01400-5 Section 01401 Quality Assurance Testing and Inspection 01401-1 01401-4 Services Section 01500 Temporary Utilities 01500-1 01500-4

GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29 Phase 1.1) DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCTION Section 02300 Earthwork 02300-1 02300-8 Section 02741 Asphalt Paving 02741-1 02741-2 Section 02742 Pavement Markings 02742-1 02742-2 Section 02751 Cement Concrete Paving 02751-1 02751-9 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 03300-1 03300-16 DIVISION 4 MASONRY Section 04200 Unit Masonry 04200-1 04200-14 DIVISION 5 METALS Section 05500 Metal Fabrications 05500-1 05500-9 DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 06100-1 06100-9 Section 06650 Solid Polymer Fabrications 06650-1 06650-3

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1 TC-2

DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07195 Air Barriers 07195-1 07195-3 Section 07210 Building Insulation 07210-1 07210-4 Section 07410 Manufactured Roof Panels 07410-1 07410-7 Section 07531 Thermoplastic Sheet Roofing (TPO) 07531-1 07531-10 Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-1 07620-4 Section 07710 Manufactured Roof Specialties 07710-1 07710-3 Section 07720 Roof Hatches 07720-1 07720-4 Section 07900 Joint Sealers 07900-1 07900-7 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08110-1 08110-5 Section 08120 Aluminum Doors and Frames 08120-1 08120-5 Section 08360 Sectional Overhead Doors 08360-1 08360-4 Section 08520 Aluminum Windows 08520-1 08520-8 Section 08710 Door Hardware 08710-1 08710-16 Section 08810 Glass 08810-1 08810-7 DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 09220 Cement Plaster Stucco 09220-1 09220-7 Section 09260 Gypsum Board Systems 09260-1 09260-10 Section 09300 Tile 09300-1 09300-12 Section 09510 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09510-1 09510-6 Section 09900 Painting 09900-1 09900-14 DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Section 10170 Plastic Toilet Compartments 10170-1 10170-6 Section 10440 Interior Signs 10440-1 10440-7 Section 10810 Toilet Accessories 10810-1 10810-5 DIVISION 17 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Section 17000 Removal of Asbestos Containing Materials 17000-1 17000-15 Asbestos Certification of Visual Inspection Form 17000-16 Section 17100 Removal / Disposal of PCB and Mercury- 17100-1 17100-3 Containing Materials

VOLUME 2 of 2 HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR-CONDITIONING CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29, PHASE 1.2)

DIVISION 15A HVAC Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 15050-1 15050-5 Section 15062 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and 15062-1 15062-8 Equipment Section 15074 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC 15074-1 15074-4 Piping and Equipment Section 15077 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 15077-1 15077-4 Section 15086 Duct Insulation 15086-1 15086-13 Section 15088 HVAC Piping Insulation 15088-1 15088-14

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1 TC-3

Section 15093 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping 15093-1 15093-2 Section 15098 Escutcheons for HVAC Piping 15098-1 15098-2 Section 15112 General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 15112-1 15112-9 Section 15124 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping 15124-1 15124-4 Section 15127 Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping 15127-1 15127-6 Section 15181 Hydronic Piping 15181-1 15181-14 Section 15183 Refrigerant Piping 15183-1 15183-6 Section 15185 Hydronic Pumps 15185-1 15185-7 Section 15189 HVAC Water Treatment 15189-1 15189-4 Section 15513 Condensing Boilers 15513-1 15513-7 Section 15550 Breechings, Chimneys and Stacks 15550-1 15550-4 Section 15725 Modular Indoor Central-Station Air Handling 15725-1 15725-10 Units Section 15732 Packaged Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 15732-1 15732-7 Section 15733 Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilators 15733-1 15733-6 Section 15738 Split-System Air-Conditioning Units 15738-1 15738-5 Section 15761 Air Coils 15761-1 15761-3 Section 15762 Unit Heaters 15762-1 15762-4 Section 15764 Convection Heating Units 15764-1 15764-4 Section 15815 Metal Ducts 15815-1 15815-12 Section 15820 Ductwork Accessories 15820-1 15820-7 Section 15838 HVAC Power Ventilators 15838-1 15838-5 Section 15840 Air Terminal Units 15840-1 15840-5 Section 15855 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 15855-1 15855-4 Section 15900 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls 15900-1 15900-52 Section 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 15950-1 15950-18

PLUMBING CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29 Phase 1.3) DIVISION 15B PLUMBING Section 15051 Common Motor Requirements for 15051-1 15051-3

Plumbing Equipment Section 15061 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and 15061-1 15061-11 Equipment Section 15075 Identification for Plumbing Piping and 15075-1 15075-6 Equipment Section 15061 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing 15061-1 15061-11 Piping and Equipment Section 15082 Plumbing Piping Insulation 15082-1 15082-15 Section 15111 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 15111-1 15111-6 Section 15121 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing 15121-1 15121-3 Piping Section 15123 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 15123-1 15123-7 Section 15124 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping 15124-1 15124-5 Section 15140 Domestic Water Piping 15140-1 15140-10 Section 15145 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 15145-1 15145-8 Section 15146 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping 15146-1 15146-3 Section 15150 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 15150-1 15150-11 Section 15151 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 15151-1 15151-10 Section 15194 Facility Natural Gas Piping 15194-1 15194-16

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1 TC-4

Section 15410 Commercial Water Closets 15410-1 15410-5 Section 15411 Commercial Urinals 15411-1 15411-3 /Section 15412 Commercial Lavatories 15412-1 15412-6 Section 15413 Commercial Showers, Receptors and Basins 15413-1 15413-4 Section 15415 Pressure Water Coolers 15415-1 15415-4 Section 15486 Fuel-Fired, Domestic Water Heaters 15486-1 15486-7

ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29 Phase 1.4) DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Section 16055 Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination 16055-1 16055-8 Study Section 16056 Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash 16056-1 16056-7 Study Section 16060 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 16060-1 16060-6 Section 16072 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 16072-1 16072-5 Section 16075 Identification for Electrical Systems 16075-1 16075-7 Section 16091 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical 16091-1 16091-3 Raceways and Cabling Section 16092 Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Low Voltage 16092-1 16092-4 Pathways and Cabling Section 16120 Conductors and Cables 16120-1 16120-5 Section 16130 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 16130-1 16130-8 Section 16140 Wiring Devices 16140-1 16140-7 Section 16231 Packaged Engine Generators 16231-1 16231-12 Section 16289 Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical 16289-1 16289-4 Power Circuits Section 16410 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 16410-1 16410-5 Section 16415 Transfer Switches 16415-1 16415-7 Section 16420 Enclosed Controllers 16420-1 16420-6 Section 16442 Panelboards 16442-1 16442-8 Section 16491 Fuses 16491-1 16491-4 Section 16511 Interior Lighting 16511-1 16511-8 Section 16711 Pathways for Low Voltage Systems 16711-1 16711-7 Section 16717 Communications Horizontal Cabling 16717-1 16717-9 Section 16718 Conductors and Cables for Low Voltage 16718-1 16718-8 Systems Section 16721 Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System 16721-1 16721-17

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1 LD-1

LIST OF DRAWINGS

NUMBER AND TITLE OF DRAWINGS CS-1 Cover Sheet CS-2 Site Staging Plan CS-3 Construction Sequencing Plan GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29 PHASE 1.1) CIVIL C101 Site Plan C102 Site Details STRUCTURAL S001 Structural Notes & Typical Details S101 Roof Framing Plan ARCHITECTURAL A001 Symbol Key, Abbreviations & Code Study Sheet A002 Building Code Plan A100 Demolition Plan A101 Overview Floor Plan A102 Floor Plan Area ‘A’ A103 Floor Plan Area ‘B’ A104 Floor Plan Area ‘C’ A105 Mezzanine Floor Plan A106 Roof Plan A107 Reflected Ceiling Plan A301 Exterior Elevations A411 Wall Sections A531 Details A801 Interior Elevations A900 Door & Window Schedules A901 Base Bid #5 Door Schedule A901 Room Finish Schedule & Material Schedule HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR-CONDITIONING CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29 PHASE 1.2) HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING H000 HVAC Symbols, Notes & Abbreviations H100 Lower Level Plan – Demo – HVAC H101 Mezzanine Level Plan – Demo – HVAC H200 Lower Level Plan – New Work – HVAC H201 Mezzanine Level Plan – New Work – HVAC H300 Lower Level Plan – Piping – HVAC H301 Mezzanine Level Plan – Piping – HVAC H600 HVAC – Large Scale Plans H700 HVAC – Details

D.G.S. 962-29 Phase 1 LD-2

H701 HVAC - Details H800 HVAC – Schedules PLUMBING CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29 PHASE 1.3) PLUMBING P000 Plumbing Symbols, Notes & Abbreviations P100 Overall Plan – Demolition – Plumbing P200 Overall Plan – New Work – Plumbing P400 Large Scale Plans – New Work – Plumbing P700 Plumbing Details P800 Plumbing Schedules ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DGS 962-29 PHASE 1.4) ELECTRICAL E000 Electrical Symbols, Notes & Abbreviations E001 Site Plan - Electrical E100 Lower Level Plan – Demo – Electrical E101 Mezzanine Level Plan – Demo – Electrical E200 Lower Level & Mezzanine Plans – New Work – Lighting E201 Lower Level & Mezzanine Plans – Emergency System – Base Bid 4 E300 Lower Level Floor Plan – New Work - Electrical E301 Mezzanine Level Plan – New Work – Electrical E600 Electrical – Large Scale Plans E700 Existing Conditions Electrical One-Line Diagram E701 New Work Electrical One-Line Diagram E702 Details – Electrical E800 Schedules - Electrical The Professional, when directed by the Department, will furnish from time to time, as the work progresses, such supplemental drawings as may be required for further illustrating the details of the work, but these supplemental drawings will not include the shop drawings, all of which are to be prepared by the contractor and submitted as specified for approval before the work is started.